JP2023090973A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation is performed, rotation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R depending on an operation of a start lever 41 is started. As a result of an operation of stop switches 42-44, the corresponding reel stops, and a stop spot corresponding to a lottery result can stop. During the winning of a pressing order combination when results of the winning are different according to the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, pressing order notification can be performed in an AT mode, which is entered after an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter C is won. Furthermore, specific notification may be performed, which enables transfer from an advantageous section to a normal section on the basis of the AC counter C that is obtained in advance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
a specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a predetermined specific event will occur in a specific game;
specific execution means for causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
with
When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode in a predetermined game in a specific state in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted, the specific game becomes a first specific game,
In the predetermined game in the specific state, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the specific game is a game after the first specific game. It is characterized by becoming a second specific game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for RB status; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table and an addition game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows a process for pushing down. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing MY update processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of a lottery information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the AT counter value associated with each winning combination in the AT mode transition lottery table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and a game lottery result; 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of completion|finish. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of winning combinations in the RB state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining AT counters associated with winning combinations in RB state; It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending|holding display. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a process of updating a game that is scheduled to end, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an overview of the display of a scheduled end. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT lottery at the end of RB; 10 is a flow chart showing processing for display on hold in modified example 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a reservation display lottery table. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing processing for display on hold in Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a pending display process in Modified Example 3. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a winning combination in the RB state in Modification 4; FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a winning combination in the RB state in Modification 5; In Modified Example 6, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given, and (b) to (d) are diagrams showing part of the lottery table for each state. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the progress of the game during the RB state; It is a flow chart which shows AT lottery processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the lottery table for each state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the first specified combination and the second specified combination; It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of the information storage area for lottery. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending|holding display. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of specific alerting|reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of specific alerting|reporting. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for display on hold in modified example 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of specific alerting|reporting. 13 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in Modification 2. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a first stop OFF effect setting process during a fall replay, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the information for end design avoidance. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the information for end design stop. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold shift process in Modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific information lottery table. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a pending shift process in Modification 4; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a specific notification lottery process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a specific notification lottery table. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the specific notification and the notification when the winning order of the bell is won;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, every time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the valid line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol are arranged at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the valid line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 2 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th small winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "black BAR", "watermelon", and "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" and "white" symbols on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small win is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st Replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the activated line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 2-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 15 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 2-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 15 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for role. When the 41st minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state.

The state transition winning prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first RB winning prize, the second RB winning prize, and the CB winning prize.

When the "red 7" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the active line, the first RB wins and the game state shifts to the first RB state. Also, when the "white BAR" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the active line, the second RB wins, and the game state shifts to the second RB state. "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols, and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning a prize, there is a stop roll that shifts to the first RT state when the game is stopped on condition that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a “red bell” or “white bell” pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a “white BAR”, “LUCKY”, “red 7”, “white bell”, and “white bell” patterns. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" design, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" design, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" design, a "youth" design, and a "white bell" design. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the number of medals to be output. In other words, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing , the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the RB state, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not is calculated and stored in a backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to the respective display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling the game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S214 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 token is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the RB state and the CB state, and the game states other than the RB state and the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state) , 3rd RT state) are set to "1" and "3". That is, in the RB state and the CB state, the affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the RB state and the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205 on condition that it is. In other words, in a game state other than the RB state and the CB state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, a bet command including information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S210, reel control processing in step S211, medal payout processing in step S212, RT state processing in step S213, and bonus state processing in step S214 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, an RB state, and a CB state. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set in the following step S304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, it is determined whether or not any one of the first RB, second RB and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 54) including any one of the first RB, second RB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, the corresponding bonus winning flag (first RB winning flag, second RB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308 the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the first RB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning winning flag, and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a small win winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (first RB winning flag) indicating that the first RB has been won or a winning flag (second RB winning flag) indicating that the second RB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first RB winning flag and the second RB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 to step S308 in a state in which the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the first RB, second RB, and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first RB, If a winning combination other than the second RB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st RB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st RB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Also, in a state where the 1st RB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV is 35, the 2nd RB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in the state that the 1st RB winning flag or the 2nd RB winning flag is carried over, and in the state that the 1st RB winning flag or the 2nd RB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the first RB, second RB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/37.4, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/18.7. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the first RB alone (probability of winning when IV=52) is about 1/328. The probability of winning the second RB alone (probability of winning when IV=53) is about 1/262 to about 1/437, and the winning probability differs depending on the set value. More specifically, the probability of single winning the second RB is highest at setting 6 and lowest at setting 1, and is set such that the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/3.25 to about 1/3.27.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV = 15) and the 28th minor winning combination winning flag, the 32nd minor winning winning flag to the 35th minor winning winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination and the 32nd minor winning combination winning flag are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the small wins to the 35th minor win can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34), and the 28th minor combination winning flag, the 33rd minor combination winning flag, the 35th minor combination winning flag and the 1st RB winning flag are set, The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, the 35th small winning combination and the 1st RB winning prize can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win win is not possible, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1st RB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1st RB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and the 1st RB winning is set, the 9th replay winning is established with priority over the 1st RB winning. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the winning of the first RB is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning of the first RB and the winning of the first replay is set, then the winning of the first RB is higher than that of the winning of the first RB. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the combination of winning symbols is set so that, when a re-game is won, one of the re-games among the re-games that are won wins a prize. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols in the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols on the middle reel 32M in the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the engine is stopped. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after being slid by a maximum of four symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. are set as valid lines. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

A case in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the top row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol or the ninth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor role symbol, the seventh minor role symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 9th "second replay" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the seventh minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning, if the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins will win. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the ninth minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the second minor combination in the 3-bet game. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol (the "first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result. However, since the transitional number does not correspond to winning as described above, when the transitional number stops, none of the corresponding small wins wins. In this case, since no corresponding benefit is awarded, medals are not paid out (0 medals are paid out).

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. One of the case where winning is established, the case where the ninth minor winning combination is established, and the case where the transition rolls are stopped and none of the minor winning combinations are established and the game is lost.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. In this case, nine medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to winning the first minor combination in the 3-bet game.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the operation timing, a small winning combination may be established, or the transitional number may stop on the effective line and the winning may be lost. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. In subsequent step S416, a random number acquisition process is executed to acquire a random number for the lottery used for the display mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition seed processing will also be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so as to let the display control device 81 recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , the medal payout process is terminated. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the RB state or the CB state, which is a bonus state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of a counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is displayed. is subtracted.

Next, the RT state processing of step S213 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. When it is determined in step S502 that the game state in which the transition roll is stopped is not the normal game state, the RT state is terminated as it is. In this case, even if the transition roll is stopped, the transition of the game state does not occur.

If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 2.14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is IV=1, the normal replay win is won, and if the winner is IV=2, the first promotion replay 1 wins, and the IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. That is, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small win, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to This relationship is not limited to the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same applies to other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay winning has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/26.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/32.8, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/18.2. The odds of not winning any role are about 1/4.88 to about 1/4.92. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

In addition, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the first re-game winning, or in the operation order corresponding to the fifth re-game winning and the first re-game winning When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, basically stop control is performed so as to establish the fourth re-game winning prize and the fifth re-game winning prize, and these fourth re-game winning prize and fifth re-game winning prize are established. Stop control is performed so as to establish the first regame winning when the winning cannot be established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process. Further, when it is determined in step S509 that neither the fourth re-game winning nor the fifth re-game winning has been established, this processing is terminated as it is.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". The lottery table for the 3rd RT state differs from the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24) in the point values PV for IV=1, 6 to 14, and the same point values are used for the other index values IV. A value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1 is about 1/5.48, and winning at IV=6 to 8 is about 1/5.48. The probabilities are about 1/12.0, respectively, and the probability of not winning when IV=9 and 10, and the probability of winning when IV=11 and 12 is about 1/1060. Also, in the 3rd RT state, it becomes possible to win specific replay 1 and specific replay 2 with IV=14 and 15, and the probability of winning at IV=14 and 15 is about 1/238, respectively. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 4.94 to about 1 in 4.97. That is, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, the odds of losing are lower than in the normal game state, the 1st RT state, and the 2nd RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, when the state is shifted to the 3rd RT state, the prize mode in which the replay privilege is awarded changes to a state different from that in the 2nd RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state A 7th regame win, an 8th regame win, a 3rd regame win that shifts to the 2nd RT state, an 11th regame win as a cherry replay, and a 12th regame win as a watermelon play are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when winning BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2, specific replay 1, or specific replay 2, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Stop information is set to change the winning mode established by.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, any one of the first re-game winning, the seventh re-game winning and the eighth re-game winning is established without fail. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning, the sixth replay winning and the eighth replay winning is established without fail.

FIG. 23(d) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When the specific replay 1 and the specific replay 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 1st replay winning prize, the 11th replay winning prize, and the 12th replay winning prize in any of the specific replays. One of the winning prizes is guaranteed. In the present embodiment, the third replay winning, in which the winning flag is set when the specific replay 2 is won, is not associated with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the specific replay 2 winning is performed. In this case, the third replay win is not established regardless of the operation order. More specifically, when the specific replay 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 11th replay prize, which is a cherry replay, is established, and the middle stop is established. When the switch 43 is operated first, the twelfth regame winning, which is the watermelon play, is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the first regame winning is established. On the other hand, when the specific replay 2 is won, the operation order associated with the 11th replay winning and the 12th replay winning is opposite to that of the specific replay 1, and the left stop switch 42 is The 12th re-game win is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the 11th re-game win is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the right stop switch 44 is operated first. , the first replay win is established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the RB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S617 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any one of the first RB winning flag, second RB winning flag, and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 54, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence relationship between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination to 28th minor winning combination, and 31st minor winning combination to 40th minor winning combination are established. Payout is performed, and when the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination, the 29th minor winning combination to the 30th minor winning combination, and the 41st minor winning combination are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ), there may be an SB state to transition to based on.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the first RB winning has been established.

Then, when the first RB winning is established, the first RB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the first RB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. set a flag. Thereafter, in step S612, 110 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 110 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the first RB state, and the first RB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the first RB state.

If it is determined in step S609 that the first RB winning has not been established, it is determined in step S613 whether or not the second RB winning has been established. Then, when the second RB win is established, the second RB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S614, and the second RB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S615. set a flag. Thereafter, in step S616, 110 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 110 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S616 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the second RB state, and the second RB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the second RB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S616, the gaming state shifts to the first RB state or the second RB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RB state or the second RB state based on the fact that the first RB setting flag or the second RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. , selects the corresponding RB state lottery table.

FIG. 28 collectively shows a lottery table for the first RB state selected in the first RB state to which the first RB wins, and a lottery table for the second RB state selected in the second RB state to which the second RB wins. . In the first RB state lottery table and the second RB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV=1-14, 16-30, and 34-58. Therefore, in either the first RB state or the second RB state, winning is not possible with IV=1 to 14, 16 to 30, and 34 to 58. Also, in the lottery table for the first RB state and the lottery table for the second RB state, point values of IV=32 to 33 are common to both lottery tables. Also, the probability of winning the 2nd role in the IV=32 RB and the probability of winning the 3rd role in the IV=RB are both about 1/6.55.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the first RB state and the lottery table for the second RB state, different point values are set for IV=15 and 31, and the probability of winning the strong cherry with IV=15 is the same as in the first RB state. In the second RB state, it is 1/2, whereas in the 2nd RB state it is 1/2 to 1/3. In addition, the probability of winning the first role in the RB with IV=31 is about 1/5.13 in the first RB state, while it is about 1/2.77 to about 5.13 in the second RB state. 1/1. In these second RB states, the probability of winning the strong cherry of IV=15 and the first hand of the RB of IV=31 differs depending on the setting value, and setting 6 is the most likely to win the strongest cherry and the first hand of the RB. Setting 1 is the most difficult to win the strongest cherry and the first role in the RB, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win the strong cherry and the harder it is to win the first role in the RB. ing.

In other words, in the 1st RB state and the 2nd RB state, the winning probability of the strong cherry with IV=15 is higher than in the normal game state, the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, and the like. Comparing the first RB state and the second RB state, the winning probability of the strong cherry is the same regardless of the setting value in the first RB state (the winning probability is common), but in the second RB state, the winning probability is the same. , and the winning probability of the first combination in RB differs depending on the set value. As already explained, since the prescribed number of bets in the RB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be paid out if a strong cherry or a 1st to 3rd RB combination is won in the RB state.

In the case of strong cherries, even in a 2-bet game, winning is established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, if a strong cherry win is made during the RB state, 15 medals are paid out, or no medals are paid out as a result of a dropout.

In the following description, in order to facilitate comparison of strong cherries of IV=15 in the first RB state and second RB state with strong cherries of IV=15 in other states, RB medium-strong cherries are also referred to as RB medium-strong cherries, and other states are simply referred to as strong cherries.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, when the first winning combination is won in the RB, the winning of the first minor winning combination is always established regardless of the operating order and timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44. On the other hand, for the 2nd RB win and the 3rd RB win, the 1st minor win is associated with 4 of the 6 operating orders, and the 2nd playing order is associated with the 2 operating orders. 1 small winning combination, 39th small winning combination, and 40th small winning combination are associated with each other. That is, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first minor winning combination, the 2nd winning combination or the 3rd winning combination during the RB is established, and the first minor winning combination or the 1st minor winning combination is established. If it matches the 39th minor winning combination and the 40th minor winning combination, any one of the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination and the 40th minor winning combination is established. In the 2-bet game in the RB state, when the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, 15 medals are paid out.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the 39th and 40th small wins differ from the first small win only in the symbols associated with the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are different. The symbols associated with are common to the 1st, 39th and 40th small wins. Also, the symbols associated with the right reel 32R are different between the 39th minor winning combination and the 40th minor winning combination. When the 2nd role in the RB or the 3rd role in the RB is won, the symbols corresponding to the 39th and 40th minor wins ("black BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol) are placed on the right reel 32R at the effective position. If the stop operation is performed at a timing that can be stopped, the 39th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, and the symbol corresponding to the 39th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination cannot be stopped at the effective position. , the first minor win is established. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which of the 1st minor winning combination, the 39th minor winning combination and the 40th minor winning combination has been established from the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. More specifically, which of the 1st RB, 2nd RB and 3rd RB wins has been won can be determined from the stop symbols on the right reel 32R. When the 1st RB combination, the 2nd RB combination, and the 3rd RB combination are won, 15 medals are paid out regardless of the operation order or operation timing.

If a negative determination is made in step S613 and none of the RB winnings have been established, a carryover command is set in step S617. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game, resulting in a so-called carry-over state, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st RB, 2nd RB, CB) of IV=34 to 51 is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small winning combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a double winning combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small winning combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the RB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S618. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the RB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the RB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the RB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S618, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, when the first RB and the second RB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding RB win is established. Therefore, when the RB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the 1st RB state or the 2nd RB state ends, even if the 1st RB win is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. . When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When shifting to the RB state, the player can expect a maximum increase of 104 (=15×8-2×8) medals until the RB state ends.

As described above, when a strong cherry is won in the RB state, winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and medals will not be paid out in the game unless winning is established. That is, in the RB state, the maximum number of payouts is set (110), and if 15 coins are paid out every game, a maximum increase of 104 medals can be expected as described above, and the RB state ends after 8 games. However, depending on the lottery result of each game in the RB state and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game, the number of medals to be increased when the upper limit number of payouts is reached may be less than the maximum number. , is set so that the number of games until reaching the upper limit payout number can be increased.

When none of the 1st RB winning flag, 2nd RB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and when none of the 1st RB winning prize, the 2nd RB winning prize, or the CB winning prize is established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S617 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S618, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the RB state, when the number of medals paid out in the RB state reaches 110, the RB state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the transition roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the RB state when the RB winning is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery processing using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the state does not shift from the normal game state to the second RT state to the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state. Further, in the first RT state, when the corresponding RB prize is not established in the game in which each RB winning flag is set, that is, when the RB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, When the corresponding RB prize is established in the game in which each 1RB winning flag is set, the game state shifts to the RB state. In the 1RT state, even if a drop occurs in a game in which the pressing order bell is won and the number for the transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. Further, when the second re-game winning is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, when the corresponding RB prize is not established in the game in which each RB winning flag is set, that is, when the RB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each RB winning flag is set. When the corresponding RB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the RB state. In the second RT state, even if there is a failure in the game in which the winning order of the bell is won and the number for transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, when the second regame winning is established, the game state shifts to the 1st RT state. The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, when the corresponding RB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the RB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each RB winning flag is set. When the corresponding RB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the RB state. In the 3rd RT state, even if a failure occurs in a game in which the pressing order bell is won, and the number for transition is stopped, the transition to the game state does not occur.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the RB state, and the CB state. (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), and RB mode are managed by the main controller 101 .

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The RB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first RB win or the second RB win is established, and ends when the RB state ends. That is, the RB mode is a display mode corresponding to the RB state. Therefore, when shifting to the RB mode, the player can expect an increase of 104 medals at maximum.

When the normal mode is shifted to the RB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the RB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the RB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the RB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the RB mode, the AT mode is restored after the RB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Specific replay 1, specific replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In normal mode, a lottery for transition to CZ mode or AT mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to CZ mode or AT mode is won, the normal mode shifts to CZ mode or AT mode. When shifting to the AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the pressing order bell wins or when the pressing order replay wins.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the 1st RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.92 each time one game is played, and if the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state. In some cases, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and if the gaming state at that time is the 3rd RT state, the number of medals will increase by about 0.08 each time one game is played. can be expected.

The CZ mode is a so-called chance zone mode in which the probability of winning a lottery to switch to the AT mode is higher than in the normal mode. The CZ mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. The expected increase/decrease in medals per game in the CZ mode is the same as in the above normal mode, and in the normal game state or the first RT state, the medals decrease by about 0.92 each time one game is played. If the game state at that time is the 2nd RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and if the game state at that time is the 3rd RT state, It can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.08 each time one game is played. In the CZ mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified when the push order bell wins or when the push order replay wins. It is preferable to set the frequency of notification of the operation sequence, such as probability, to be lower in the CZ mode than in the AT mode. As a configuration for notifying the operation order in the CZ mode, for example, while notifying the operation order for a predetermined number of times (once) when the pressing order bell is won during the stay, the operation when the pressing order bell is won after that A configuration may be adopted in which the order is not notified.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The AT mode is a mode that starts with the initial number of games set to a predetermined number (for example, 50). is played, the AT mode is switched to the normal mode.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state, and mainly corresponds to the third RT state. More specifically, in the AT mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported even when the press order replay is won, so that a transition from the first RT state to the second RT state and from the second RT state to the third RT state occurs. , stays in the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state and the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.52 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state. In some cases, the number of medals can be expected to increase by about 0.82 each time one game is played, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state, the number of medals will increase by about 2.00 each time one game is played. can be expected. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

Regarding the shift of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, it is common to shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. may or may not pass through the CZ mode.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode and the RB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, RB states, and CB states are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation sequence that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is reported, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the press order bell and the press order replay win are announced as described above. There is no notification of the order of operation when winning the order bell or the push order replay. Therefore, the AT mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal mode and the CZ mode in terms of whether or not there is notification of the push order bell and the operation order at the time of winning the push order replay. From the viewpoint of ease of shifting to the AT mode, the CZ mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode. In other words, the AT mode is included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of small wins and the like by notifying the order of operations. The CZ mode, in which the transition rate to the mode is high, is also included in the advantageous section.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, it grasps whether it is in the RB state, CB state, or other states (normal game state, each RT state, first RB state, second RB state). As already explained, the specified number of bets is set to 2 in the RB state or CB state, and the specified number of bets is set to 1 or 3 in other states. Then, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state grasped in step S701. More specifically, in the RB state or the CB state, the prescribed number of bets is only 2, so the determination in step S702 is always affirmative. Except for the RB state and the CB state, the prescribed numbers of bets are 1 and 3 as described above. If the number of bets is 3 in a state other than the RB state or the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S702. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S703 is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 1 in a state other than the RB state or the CB state, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. In this case, the processing for the display mode after step S703 is not performed. Therefore, for example, when winning the 1st RB or the 2nd RB and trying to establish the 1st RB winning or the 2nd RB winning in the 1-bet game, the processing for the display mode is not performed.

In step S703, random number shift processing is executed. Such processing is processing for random numbers used in the AT mode lottery, and will be described in detail later.

In the subsequent step S704, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 to determine whether the current game is in the advantageous interval. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section including the AT mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S705 to execute advantageous section transition lottery processing.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) differs according to the lottery result of each game. All possible winning results are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S804, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition is won. If not, the lottery processing ends as it is. If the transfer lottery has been won, in step S806, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. By this process, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S704 of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) for the next game and thereafter. In the subsequent step S807, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. After executing the process of step S807, this advantageous section transition lottery process ends.

In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S704 that the advantageous section flag is set, that is, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won before the previous game, and in step S705 there is an advantage After executing the section transition lottery process, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won, to shift to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode, is set when shifting to the AT mode, and is cleared when the AT mode finally ends. . When a negative determination is made in step S706, AT lottery processing is executed in step S707. When an affirmative determination is made in step S706, AT addition processing is executed in step S708.

<AT lottery process>
The AT lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the AT lottery process, a transition lottery is mainly performed to determine whether to shift the display mode to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game started this time is in the second RB state. If the game is in the second RT state, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery process ends without performing the AT lottery process from step S902 onwards. As described above, the second RB state has different winning probabilities depending on the set values. On the other hand, in the first RB state, the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. In this embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in the game during the first RB state, but the AT lottery is not performed in the game during the second RB state.

In the subsequent step S902, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the current game is in the normal section, a process of acquiring the AT mode lottery table for the normal section from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is executed in step S904. Further, even if the advantageous section flag is set in step S903, if the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S905, the AT mode for the normal section is set in step S904. Get the winning flag. That is, the AT mode transition lottery in the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section.

If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set in step S905, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify whether or not the current display mode is the CZ mode, is set upon transition to the CZ mode, and is cleared upon termination of the CZ mode. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S907, the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and if the CZ mode flag is set, in step S908. , an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 .

In these AT mode transition lottery tables, as shown in FIG. 35, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination). For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for normal sections, strong cherries are more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than weak cherries. It is set so that the lower the result, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. Also, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal sections with the AT mode transition lottery table for advantageous sections and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, even with the same lottery result, the number for the advantageous section is higher than that for the normal section. It is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode transition lottery is more likely to be won for the CZ than for the advantageous section. For example, the AT mode winning rate with weak watermelon in the advantageous section is double the AT mode winning rate with weak watermelon in the normal section, and the AT mode winning rate with weak watermelon in CZ mode is higher than that. An even higher probability.

Note that the game result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery and the winning probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the superiority of the advantageous section and the CZ mode may be ensured by differentiating the type of game result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery between the normal section and the advantageous section, and the advantageous section and the CZ mode. , the types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery should be more in the advantageous section and in the CZ mode. Furthermore, in this case, the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery itself may be the same for the normal section, the advantageous section, and the CZ mode. In each CZ mode, multiple CZ modes are provided, and in one CZ mode, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery at chance A, and in other CZ modes, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery at chance B. A different AT mode transition lottery table may be set.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S904, step S907, or step S908, a process of obtaining a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S909. In step S909, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is obtained from the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. FIG. The configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f and the processing for storing the AT mode transition lottery random number in the area 106f will be described in detail later, but in step S909 the AT mode transition lottery random number is acquired. The processing is different from the configuration of acquiring the latest updated value at the time of lottery like other lotteries (for example, advantageous section transition lottery).

Then, in step S910, an AT mode shift lottery is executed, and in step S911, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the AT mode shift lottery is won, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If there is, the advantageous section flag is set in step S913, and the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S914.

When the advantageous section flag is set in step S912, or after the process of step S914 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S915. In subsequent step S916, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the first RB state. That is, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is won in the game in the first RB state. If a negative determination is made in step S916 and the game is not in the first RB state, processing for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S917 and S919.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a situation arises in which a shift to the AT mode may occur, the precursor mode is set to indicate the situation. In the omen mode, an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won is displayed on the auxiliary display part 65, the speaker 64, etc., and when the number of games in the omen mode becomes 0, the shift to the AT mode is permitted, and a message to that effect is displayed. A notification effect (AT mode winning notification effect) is performed.

In step S917, a process of determining the number of games in the portent mode (the number of portent games) by lottery is performed. As the number of precursor games, for example, 0 to 32 games are set, and which number of precursor games is likely to be selected differs depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the AT mode. For example, if the AT mode is won with strong cherries, the premonition mode of games 0 to 10 is likely to be selected, and if the AT mode is won with weak cherries, games 7 to 14 are likely to be selected. , is set.

In step S918, a process of inputting the number of precursor games determined by the lottery in step S917 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the portent mode. Then, in step S919, a portent flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and a portent command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. After that, the AT lottery processing ends. The portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the portent mode is set, and the portent command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the portent mode has been set. . The omen command includes information on the number of games in the omen mode.

If it is determined in step S916 that the AT mode transition lottery in the game in the state of the 1st RB is won, in step S920 the winning flag during the 1st RB is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S921 the 1st RB After executing the process of setting the medium winning command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT lottery process is terminated. The winning flag during the first RB is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the game in which the AT mode transition lottery was won is in the first RB state, and the winning command during the first RB is a display control to that effect. This is a command for the device 81 to grasp. Processing by setting the winning flag during the first RB and outputting the winning command during the first RB will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S911 that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S923. In the CZ mode transition lottery, a CZ mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 35) is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e to decide whether to transition to the CZ mode. hold a lottery. In the present embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as triggers for the CZ mode transition lottery. , and the winning probability is not limited to that shown in FIG.

Then, in step S924, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and if the lottery is won, the CZ mode flag is set in step S925, and the CZ counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. is set to 10 as a predetermined value, and a CZ start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . By setting the CZ mode flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S906, and it becomes possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery with an advantageous lottery table. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. When the CZ counter reaches 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared and the CZ mode ends. The CZ start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the CZ mode will start, and the display control device 81 that has received the CZ start command assists so that an effect for starting the CZ mode is performed. The display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that effects during the CZ mode are performed in each game during the CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is set in step S922, if the CZ mode transition lottery is not won in step S924, or after the process of step S925 is executed, the process proceeds to step S926 move on. In step S926, it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, although the same or similar suggestive effect as in the omen mode is generated, the effect mode ends without performing the AT mode winning notification effect that the shift to the AT mode is finally permitted. A pseudo portent mode (a mode in which a so-called fake effect is generated) is set, and the pseudo portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize the pseudo portent mode. If the pseudo portent flag is not set, in step S927, it is decided by lottery whether or not the pseudo portent mode is to be set, and the number of games in the pseudo portent mode if set. With regard to such a lottery, for example, the less likely it is to be won (lower appearance rate) as a result of the game lottery, the more likely it is to win the lottery for transition to the pseudo omen mode, and the more likely it is to be won (higher appearance rate) as a game lottery result. ) If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is won as a result, the pseudo-prediction mode with a relatively long number of games may be set. Then, in step S928, a process of inputting the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode determined in step S927 to the pseudo precursor counter is executed. If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is not won, the process of step S928 is not performed (0 is input to the pseudo-prediction counter). After that, in step S929, a pseudo precursor flag is set and a pseudo precursor command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. After that, the AT lottery process ends. The pseudo portent command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the pseudo portent mode has been set, and includes information on the number of games remaining in the pseudo portent mode. Depending on the number of remaining games, a lottery for generating a suggestive effect is performed. If the lottery for transition to the pseudo-prediction mode is not won in step S927, the AT lottery process may be terminated without performing the process of step S929.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process that is executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and the continuation of the AT mode that is started with the predetermined number of games as the initial number of continuous games. This is a process for adding the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1001, it is determined whether the game started this time is in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in any of the RB states, the AT add-on process is terminated without performing the add-on process after step S1002. That is, in the present embodiment, a lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode is not performed in the game during the RB state. If the game is not in the RB state in step S1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S1002. Then, in step S1003, an additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 36, the additional lottery table in this embodiment is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery and the number of additional games when winning are different according to the type of lottery result. For example, in strong cherry, 20 to 200 games are added in the AT mode, and the average number of games added is 40 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In subsequent step S1004, a random number (counter) for lottery is obtained from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Then, in step S1005, a lottery for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In the subsequent step S1006, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When it is determined that the addition has not been won, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, in step S1007, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to step S1007. A process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in S1005 is performed. In the following step S1008, the addition lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to perform the addition notification for notifying the winning of the addition lottery and the number of games after the fact.

In the present slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. When doing (also referred to as "immediate notification" in the following description), and when performing an additional notification in a notification game that is a game after the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (hereinafter (Also referred to as "post-loading notification") is set.

In the immediate addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred refers to, for example, a case where a continuous effect occurs with the game in which an addition has occurred, and from the game in which the addition has occurred A game that can be continued over a plurality of games is called a series of games. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG in the figure), and the post-boarding notification is for the AT mode, etc. The number of remaining games is notified later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining number counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-adding counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG).

In the above step S1008, for example, based on the game result that triggered the current addition winning and the current addition counter BG, the current addition is notified by the immediate addition notification or the subsequent addition notification. decide whether to For example, if the game result that triggered the addition winning this time is a result that makes it difficult to win the addition lottery, the addition notification is likely to be selected, and the unexpectedness of the addition notification can be enhanced. Further, if the lower the current post-boarding counter BG, the more easily the post-boarding notification is selected, it is possible to preferably increase the chances of the post-boarding notification being performed.

After executing the add-on lottery process in step S1008, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery is won in step S1009. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1010, processing is performed to add the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e. , temporarily stores the number of added games this time in a register or the like. Then, in step S1011, a notification timing setting process is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game.

In one game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set to differ according to the number of addition games. In this embodiment, assuming that the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel in the order of the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the first reel is stopped, The stop operation of the second reel and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the notification timing setting process of step S1011, the notification timing is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur when the stop OFF operation of each reel is performed than when the stop ON operation is performed. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation. In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1012, an add-on command including information that an add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, information that an immediate add-on has been selected, and information on the execution timing of the add-on notification in the current game is sent to the display control device 81. is set as an output target for AT, the AT addition processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command sets the add-on notification effect based on these pieces of information.

If it is determined in step S1009 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1013, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1014, a process of setting a post-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed, and then, in step S1015, the information of the occurrence of the addition, the number of additional games, and the post-addition notification are selected. After setting the add-on command including the information to be output to the display control device 81, the AT add-on process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the result of the lottery process this time is a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S710, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT notification flag is set at the stage when it is allowed to cause the transition to the AT mode after winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode (at the stage when the number of precursor games becomes 0 and the AT mode winning notification is performed). Flags to be set. When the notification flag for AT is set, the processing for the pushing order is executed in step S711, and then the lottery result corresponding processing is ended. If it is determined that the first prize is not won in step S709, or if the AT notification flag is not set in step S710, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Prior to the description of the process for the pressing order, the outline of the notification of the operation order (pressing order notification, pressing order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) at the time of winning the pressing order will be described. Notification of the operation order is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 .

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 38(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 38(b), by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be obtained. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a transition to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which an AT mode winning notification is performed and an AT notification flag is set, etc. is established, the light is lit in the game in which the start condition is established. Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (AT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the transition to the navigation state lottery Chance state (CZ mode, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win, or transition to navigation state or chance state Including winning state (winning mode) that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to these navigation states or chance states The section is an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the specific section in which the benefits of pushing order notification can be obtained in the advantageous section, and is not an advantageous section. It constitutes a section display (specific notification means) that is turned off during a section or a non-specific section that is not a specific section even if it is an advantageous section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who progresses the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the number-of-payout display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is lit is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Processing for push-up>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 40, the pushing order process executed in step S711 will be described.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1101 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1102, and control is performed so that the command monitor 68 performs the pressing order notification for the third replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1103, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1102, the operation sequence corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, basically, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like. By winning ~ 4, it is possible to return to the 3rd RT state early.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1104 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1105, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to perform the pressing order notification for the first replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1106, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S710, the pushing order process is not performed, so that the pushing order notification does not occur. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first regame winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S710, the push order notification does not occur. Winning 3 may establish a second replay prize, and the RT state will shift from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1104, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1107 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1108, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to perform the pressing order notification for the fourth replay or the fifth replay as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1109, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1107, it is determined in step S1110 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. BAR replays 1 and 2 are results of winning in the 3rd RT state, and either the 1st replay or the 6th to 8th replays is won depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, BAR replays 1 and 2 are set as triggers for additional lottery. Push order notification that the 7th re-game winning is established is performed, and if no additional winning is made, push order notification that any of the 1st re-game winning, 6th re-game winning and 8th re-game winning is established is performed. .

That is, if it is determined to be BAR replays 1 and 2 in step S1110, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the above-mentioned AT addition processing has been elected, and if it has not been elected, step S1105 to perform processing for notifying the pushing order of the first replay. If an additional winning is made, in step S1112, control is performed so that the pressing order notification for the seventh replay is performed on the instruction monitor 68 as the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side. After that, in step S1113, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. In addition, in the AT add-on processing in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the add-on lottery is set so that the add-on win can be made in BAR replay 1 of BAR replays 1 and 2, and the add-on win is not made in BAR replay 2. is set to Therefore, the affirmative determination in step S1111 is the case of winning the additional lottery for BAR replay 1 among BAR replays 1 and 2. In addition, in the case of BAR replay 1 and no additional winning, or in the case of BAR replay 2, in part or all, the pushing order notification corresponding to the 6th replay winning prize or the 8th replay winning prize is performed. good too.

If a negative determination is made in step S1110, it is determined in step S1114 whether or not the current lottery result is either specific replay 1 or 2. Specific replays 1 and 2 are results of winning in the 3rd RT state, and are cases in which any one of the 1st replay, 11th replay and 12th replay is won depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. . In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, as with BAR replays 1 and 2, specific replays 1 and 2 are also set as triggers for additional lottery. In the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode triggered by , a lottery is first conducted to determine which of the 11th re-game winning prize and the 12th re-game winning prize is to be established, and the additional lottery is carried out according to the result of the lottery. That is, when the 11th re-game of cherry replay is selected, 15% is additionally won, and when the 12th re-game of waterlily play is selected, 20% is additionally won (FIG. 36).

If it is a specific replay in step S1114, as a push order notification on the side of the main controller 101 corresponding to the replay on the side selected by the extra lottery in step S1115, for the 11th replay or the 12th replay is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of . After that, in step S1116, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

As described above, when the BAR replay is won, the press order for the 7th replay is notified if an additional win is made. Notification of the pressing order corresponding to the watermelon play is performed. Therefore, even if a prize is established in Cherry Replay or Watermelon Play, there may be cases where additional prizes are not added.

If a negative determination is made in step S1114, it is determined in step S1117 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the bell is won in the pressing order, the process advances to step S1118 to determine whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S1117 or step S1118, the push order process is terminated. That is, even if the AT notification flag is set, if the AT mode flag is not set and the state is in preparation before shifting to the AT mode, the push order at the time of winning the push order bell No notification is made. When the AT mode flag is set in step S1118, the instruction monitor 68 on the main controller 101 side is made to notify the pressing order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination in step S1119, and step S1120. After performing the process of setting the push order notification command in , the actual push order process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1201, game number management processing is executed. The number-of-games management process is a process for managing the number of continuous games such as the AT mode, the CZ mode, and the omen mode.

That is, in the game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in steps S1301 and S1302, the same processes as steps S701 and S702 are performed. That is, in step S1301, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, it grasps whether it is in the RB state, the CB state, or other states (normal game state, each RT state). Then, in step S1302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state ascertained in step S1301. If the determination in step S1302 is affirmative, processing for the display mode is performed in step S1303 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, the number-of-games management process ends. In this case, the processing for the display mode after step S1303 is not performed.

In step S1303, the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the current game is in the carryover state before shifting to the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in the carryover state, the CZ mode flag and the AT mode flag are erased in step S1304, and then the number-of-games management process ends. In this case, the CZ mode and AT mode are terminated. However, in the AT mode, after the RB state ends, a transition to the third RT state occurs quickly due to notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the pressing order replay. In this case, after the RB state ends, the counting of the number of games in the AT mode is resumed after the transition to the third RT state occurs.

When it is determined in step S1303 that the first RB winning flag and the second RB winning flag are not set, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1306. Then, in step S1307, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1308, and a CZ mode end command is sent to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the output target. By clearing the CZ mode flag, the CZ mode ends and the normal mode is entered. In addition, the display control device 81, which has received the CZ mode end command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the end of the CZ mode is notified (for example, a character display such as "I'm sorry" and its sound effect). and the speaker 64 are controlled.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1305 or step S1307, or if the process of step S1308 has been executed, the process advances to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag or pseudo precursor flag is set. If none of the flags is set, the game number management process is terminated. If any flag is set, the process advances to step S1310 to execute a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter or the pseudo precursor counter. That is, in step S1310, the precursor counter is decremented by 1 in the precursor mode, and the pseudo precursor counter is decremented by 1 in the pseudo precursor mode.

After executing the process of step S1310, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set and the precursor counter has become 0 in step S1311. That is, when the number of precursor games is 0 in the precursor mode, the flow advances to step S1312 to perform processing for clearing the precursor flag. Then, in step S1313, a process of setting an AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. As described above, by setting the AT notification flag, it is possible to shift the RT state to a higher RT state when winning the push order replay, and prevent the shift to a lower RT state. It becomes possible. Incidentally, in step S1304, the AT notification flag is not cleared even in the AT mode. Therefore, after the RB state ends, when the pushing order replay is won, the pushing order notification is generated, and it is possible to shift to the third RT state.

After executing the process of step S1313, the process of setting the AT mode winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1314. In the display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command, the auxiliary display section performs an AT mode winning notification effect that the AT mode transition lottery is won and the transition to the AT mode is permitted. 65 and speaker 64 are controlled. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Super lucky!!"

In step S1311, if the precursor counter is not 0, or if it is 0 but the pseudo precursor flag is set instead of the precursor flag, the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor counter is 0 and the pseudo precursor flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1315, the process of clearing the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S1316, and then the number-of-games management process ends. This will end the pseudo-precursor mode.

As described above, when the AT mode shift lottery is won in the game in the first RB state, the precursor flag is not set, so a negative determination is made in step S1309, and the processing of steps S1312 to S1314 is performed. is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in either step S1309 or step S1315, or if either step S1314 or step S1316 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S1318, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented. Then, in step S1319, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step S1320, processing for erasing the AT mode flag and the AT notification flag is performed. Thereafter, in step S1321, a process of setting an AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to ascertain whether or not the state in which the AT mode is not in the advantageous section is the state after the transition to the AT mode has occurred.

In step S1322, a process of setting an AT mode end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode end command, performs an AT mode end notification effect to indicate that the AT mode has ended (for example, a character display such as "END", a display of the number of medals won during the AT mode, a continuation game in the AT mode, etc.). The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display of the number and the sound effect thereof are performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1317 or step S1319, or if the process of step S1322 is executed, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result handling process, after the process of step S1201 is executed, the process for adding notification is executed in step S1202. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the above-mentioned post-addition notification. , the addition notification (post-addition notification) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the establishment of the fourth regame winning prize or the fifth regame winning prize. As described above, when the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established without the conditions for shifting to the AT mode being established. The process for dealing with winning results is terminated without performing any processing. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode.

At step S1205, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already the AT mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1206 to S1208.

That is, in step S1206, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1207, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. After that, in step S1208, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, on condition that the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode is set. After executing the process of step S1208, the winning result handling process is terminated. In step S1208, the case where the AT mode continuation counter is not 0 is, for example, a case where RB is won during AT mode and AT mode is resumed after RB state. Measurement is restarted while taking over the AT mode continuation counter as it is.

As described above, in particular, the display mode is shifted separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the game state to the third RT state as the main state of the AT mode. process to make it work. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted to a higher mode among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, that is, when shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. and Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state transitions due to the stoppage of the second regame winning as a fall replay, the transition of the display mode is not performed. When shifting to such a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Section display first processing>
Next, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. . As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit means that the specific section, among the advantageous sections, satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1401 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process (Fig. 32), or when the AT mode transition lottery is selected during the normal section in the AT lottery process (Fig. 33). This is a flag that is set when you win. If the advantageous section flag has been set, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, or when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the normal zone in the AT lottery process (Fig. 33). , which is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1404. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1405.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed in step S1406. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and a process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

If it is determined in step S1405 that measurement has already started, or if the process of step S1406 has been executed, the process advances to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, the pushing order notification when the pushing winning role is won becomes possible, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1408 the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section indicator. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1409 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step S1409, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the advantageous interval flag is not set, or if the game is a winning game even if the advantageous interval flag is set (after executing the processing of step S1404), the winning game Even if not, if the situation does not allow the pressing order notification to occur (if it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1408 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1410 or step S1411, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1412. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1413, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1412 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1413, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1412 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1413, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1412. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second processing is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1502, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1502, in step S1503, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Advantageous interval increase/decrease number MY is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S1503, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, in the MY update process in step S1503, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game is any replay win. In the case of any replay win, the MY update process is terminated without updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY. If there is no replay win, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, a process of subtracting the number of inserted coins (number of bets) from the number of payouts is executed based on the game result of the current game. Step S1602 is a process for grasping the number of increased medals and the number of decreased medals by subtracting the medals used in the game from the medals obtained. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the first minor winning combination is established, 3 coins are bet and 9 medals are paid out, resulting in an increase of 6 medals. Also, when the second minor win is established in the 3-bet game, 3 coins are bet and 3 medals are paid out, so there is an increase (decrease) of 0 medals. In the 3-bet game, when none of the small wins is established, 3 coins are bet and 0 medals are paid out (because no medals are paid out). A decline is occurring.

In the subsequent step S1603, a process of adding the calculation result of step S1602 to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is performed. For example, if the calculation result of step S1602 indicates that there is an increase of 6 medals, the process of adding 6 to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed, and the calculation result of step S1602 is a decrease of 3 medals. is occurring, a process of subtracting 3 from the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is executed. Then, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 0 or more. If so, in step S1605, after performing a process of clearing the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY to 0, the MY update process ends. If the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is equal to or greater than 0 and medals are increasing in the advantageous section, the MY update process is terminated as it is.

In the second section display process, after executing the MY update process in step S1503, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1504, and the remaining game number management process is executed in subsequent step S1505. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is 100 and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is 1450, even if the AT mode is performed as it is, the end condition of the AT mode ( It is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is reached before the number of AT mode remaining games=0). In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining number management process, for example, if the number of AT mode remaining games is 100 and the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY is 2300, the AT mode end condition (AT It is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section will be reached before the number of remaining games in the mode = 0). In this case, the expected increase/decrease in the number of medals per game in AT mode, the number of remaining games in AT mode, and the current increase/decrease in the number of advantageous intervals MY may reach the upper limit increase in the above advantageous interval. is high or not. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

By setting these first excess flag and second excess flag, subsequent AT mode additions will not be performed (restricted), and if you win the addition lottery, benefits different from adding the number of games (Suggestion of setting values, display of rare images, etc.) will be performed. As a result, in situations where there is a high possibility that the number of games remaining is high or the number of increases is already high, it is possible to avoid further meaningless additions, and in the above situation, Even if there is, it becomes possible to entertain the game.

After executing the processing of step S1505, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether the number of increase/decrease number of advantageous interval games MY is greater than or equal to 2400 which is the upper limit of increase in the advantageous interval. Determine whether or not. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1507. In the subsequent step S1508, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is performed. Then, in step S1509, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S1509 is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if an omen flag, a pseudo omen flag, a CZ mode flag, an AT mode winning flag, an AT notification flag, an AT mode flag, etc. are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the counter for the number of continuous games in the portent mode, AT mode, etc. is greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1506 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit, or if it is determined that the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process advances to step S1510 to normally end the advantageous section. Determine whether the conditions are met. More specifically, it is determined whether or not none of the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set and the number of remaining continuous games in the AT mode or the like is zero. If none of these flags have been set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the AT end flag has been set. The AT end flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode ends. If the AT end flag is set, the process advances to step S1507 to perform advantageous section end processing in steps S1507 to S1509, and then end the second section display processing. If a negative determination is made in step S1510 or step S1511, the second section display process is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues. That is, not only during the AT mode, but after the transition to the advantageous section and in a state where the transition to the AT mode has not occurred, the advantageous section does not end. By finishing, the advantageous section ends.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 46, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the next game of the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (Advantageous section game counting of number AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, etc., when the push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up assuming that it has been established.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated, the push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., and the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) where the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who finishes the game without knowing that the situation is such that he/she can enjoy the benefits of the pushing order notification and a succeeding player who takes a seat after that. can be made In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order notification does not occur, so the game can be gracefully ended.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. A bet time command is a command output from the main controller 101 when a bet operation is performed, and includes a bet command set in step S207 of normal processing. If it is a bet time command, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1704. In the effect setting process at the time of betting, a process for controlling the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed so that an effect based on the current betting operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The start time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the lottery result correspondence There are an omen command, an additional command, a pressing order notification command, a specific pressing order notification command, and the like, which are set in the process. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the process of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1708, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the processing of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, there are an AT mode start command, an AT mode end command, and the like, which are set in the winning result handling process. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

When a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the effect setting process at the start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, display mode setting processing is performed. In this processing, it is determined which of the normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, and RB mode the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is, and the auxiliary display section is displayed in the corresponding display mode. It is set so that the display effect of 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area for setting a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, and an RB state mode flag is provided as a flag for grasping the display mode. A corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end. In step S1801, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display section 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S1802, processing for pending shift is executed. The pending shift process is a process for displaying pending information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described later in detail.

In step S1803, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S1804, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S1903, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform a pushing order notification effect in which the third replay winning prize is established. End the process.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S1905 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like to perform a push order notification effect for establishing the first replay winning prize, and then perform a push order notification process. finish.

If it is determined in step S1904 that the replays are not falling replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, in step S1907, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a push order notification effect in which the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. End the forward notification process.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the replays are not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1708 whether or not the current lottery results are BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not an add-on command has been received as the command at the start of this time. That is, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery when winning BAR replays 1 and 2 is won. If the add-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1905, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform a push order notification effect that establishes the first regame winning prize, and then executes the push order notification process. finish.

If it is determined in step S1909 that the add-on command has been received, the process advances to step S1910 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like so as to perform a push order notification effect that establishes the seventh regame winning prize. End the forward notification process.

If it is determined in step S1908 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1911 whether or not the current lottery results are specific replays 1 and 2. In the case of the specific replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1712 whether or not notification of the pressing order corresponding to the cherry replay (11th replay) is to be performed. That is, when the cherry replay is selected in the extra lottery at the time of winning the specific replay 1, 2, in step S1913, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification effect that the 11th replay win is established. Then, the pressing order informing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1912 that the operation order to be reported this time does not correspond to the 11th re-game winning as a cherry replay, but corresponds to the 12th re-game winning as a waterlily play, then in step S1914. , the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a push-order notification effect in which the 12th regame winning is established, and then the push-order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not specific replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S1915 whether or not the lottery result of this time is the pushing order bell. If it is the pressing order bell, in step S1916, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform a pressing order notification effect in which the first minor winning combination of 9 coins is paid out, and then the main pressing order notification processing is performed. exit. If a negative determination is made in step S1915, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 48), if it is determined in step S1803 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. The shift trigger combination is, for example, a so-called rare combination with a low winning probability, such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, overlapping strong cherry 1, 2, overlapping weak cherry 1, 2, etc. , AT mode, bonus state, etc. are expected results. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S1806. In the process for informing the player of the transitional opportunity, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the auxiliary display unit 65 are arranged so as to perform a chance suggestion presentation as a presentation suggesting that there is a high possibility that some kind of advantageous event will occur based on the winning of the transitional opportunity. A process for controlling the speaker 64 or the like is performed, or a process for performing a continuous effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1805, or after the processing of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S1808, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S1808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the subsequent step S2002, processing for grasping the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the processing on the side of the main controller 101, and the determined timing information is set in the above-described addition command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2002, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2002 indicates that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the processing for setting the addition effect is terminated as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and turned on as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2005, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2705, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2004, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When it is the time of the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2007, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated at the time of the stop OFF operation of the target reel. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also, in step S2007, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2006, in step S2008, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2008, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007 or step S2008, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S1807, or after the process of step S1808 is executed, the effect setting process during the bonus is executed in step S1809, and the process proceeds to step S1810. Then, in step S1811, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The mid-bonus effect setting process is a process for performing the mid-bonus effect in the first RB state or the second RB state on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In the effect during the bonus, for example, the content of each effect is set to be different so that the player can distinguish between the first RB state and the second RB state. Further, it is set so that an effect is performed according to the lottery results in the first RB state and the second RB state. Also, the continuous effect setting process is a process for performing a continuous effect in which a series of effects are set over a plurality of games. In the process of step S1811, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2104, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional production will occur. Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the first reel shown in FIG. 39(a) is displayed as the operation target. . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 39(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed to be stopped as shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 39(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2105 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is finished. If the command is not the stop OFF command, the processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the process advances to step S2106 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2108, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2202, a process of setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start presentation, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "AT start!". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stopping command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2204, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode ending presentation, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "AT END", displays the number of games to be continued in the current AT mode, and displays the total number of payouts in the current AT mode. do. In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

After either step S2202 or step S2204 is executed, or after a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S1807 in the process of setting the effect at the start. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 50), when the timing of occurrence of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2206, processing for pending display is executed. The pending display processing is processing for displaying pending information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and such processing will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S2206, after setting other effects at the time of stop in step S2207, the present effect setting process is terminated. In step S2207, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing on the side of the main controller 101 is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a shift lottery to shift to an advantageous section, and then winning a lottery to shift to the AT mode included in the advantageous section and shifting to the AT mode. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the AT mode and shifting to the third RT state as an RT state in which the replay probability is improved, in the RT state, the pushing order bell winning can be established with the replay probability improved. medals can be obtained.

As already explained, when shifting to the AT mode, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the game can be played in the AT mode over the initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can also be increased.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode is 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the advantageous section is 0, or when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section (complete 1500 games or increase 2400 cards) are met. , end processing of the advantageous section (AT mode) is performed in the second section display processing. As already explained, in the end processing of the advantageous section, various parameters (various types of information) in the advantageous section are initialized so that the information in the advantageous section is not inherited after the advantageous section ends. , the advantageous section and the normal section can be clearly distinguished.

<Regarding AT mode transition lottery>
The lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery of the slot machine 10 will be described below.

As already explained, the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the AT lottery process in the lottery result handling process. The AT mode transition lottery includes a lottery result of lottery processing in the game in which the transition lottery is performed (in the following description, also referred to as "game lottery result" or simply "lottery result"), an AT mode transition lottery table, It is based on a random number (counter value) for lottery. The lottery result of each game is the result of lottery processing performed based on the start operation of each game (operation of the start lever 41), and the AT mode transition lottery table is stored in advance in the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. On the other hand, the random number for the lottery is acquired in advance in the game before the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing as processing for pre-acquiring random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition process is a process executed at step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 18), and is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. In other words, among the stopping operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the third stopping operation is performed based on the third stop OFF operation.

In step S2301, a process of obtaining the AT counter C provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter C corresponds to a lottery random number used for the AT mode transition lottery. The AT counter C is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 999 and returns to the initial value (0) after reaching the maximum value (999). The AT counter C is periodically updated, for example, incremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

It should be noted that, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine the suitability of the role, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit are used, and before the processing of step S2301 (for example, at the time of the third stop OFF operation) A hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter and read the latched value in step S2301. Alternatively, the latched value may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 106 until the process of step S2301 is performed.

In step S2302, a process of storing the value of the AT counter C obtained in step S2301 in the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106 is executed. The lottery information storage area 106f, as shown in FIG. 55, comprises a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The memory area RE consists of a plurality of memory areas, and includes a first memory area RE1 to a fifth memory area RE5.

In the first storage area RE1 to the fifth storage area RE5, when the conditions for obtaining the AT counter C are satisfied, the AT is stored in the order of the first storage area RE1→second storage area RE2→third storage area RE3 . . . A counter C is stored chronologically. By having five storage areas as a plurality of storage areas, up to five random numbers for lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S2302, the value of the AT counter C acquired in step S2301 is stored in the area with the smallest number (the youngest area) among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the fifth storage area RE5. For example, when the value of the AT counter C is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the fourth storage area RE4, and the fifth storage area RE5 is an empty area, in step S2302, in step S2301 The acquired value of the AT counter C is stored in the fifth storage area RE5.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the value of the AT counter C as it is, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C is stored. may be stored after being converted to .

In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the game to end this time is a game in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in any of the RB states, the processing for setting the AT command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed in step S2304, and then the random number acquisition processing is terminated. The AT command includes information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored this time as well as information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE5. Therefore, the display control device 81 can grasp the information of each storage area RE1 to RE5 in the lottery information storage area 106f by receiving the AT command.

If it is determined in step S2303 that it is not in the RB state, this random number acquisition process ends without outputting an AT command. Therefore, in games other than the RB state, although the AT counter C is obtained, the AT command is not output.

The above random number acquisition process is started regardless of the lottery result, game state, display mode, etc. of each game, and the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the lottery result, game state, display mode, etc. of each game. . That is, the AT counter C is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition, the game state, the display mode, and the like.

Next, the random number shift process for sequentially shifting the AT mode lottery random numbers stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE5 of the lottery information storage area 106f will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The random number shift process is a process executed in step S703 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31).

In step S2401, the lottery random number information (information corresponding to the AT counter C) stored in the first storage area RE1 among the storage areas RE1 to RE5 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the first A process of clearing the random number information stored in the storage area RE1 is performed. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the current game. Then, in the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process (FIG. 33), in the process of acquiring the random number for the lottery in step S909, the information corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is transferred to the current AT lottery. Acquired as random number information used for mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information shifted to the execution area AE among the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance.

In the subsequent step S2402, processing is performed to shift the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE5 to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared. Information in each area is shifted in the order of second storage area RE2, fourth storage area RE4→third storage area RE3, fifth storage area RE5→fourth storage area RE4. In this case, only information is shifted from the fifth memory area RE5 to the fourth memory area RE4, and new information is not shifted. That is, the information in the fifth memory area RE5 is cleared, and the fifth memory area RE5 becomes an empty area.

In the subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not the game to end this time is the game in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in any of the RB states, in step S2404 a process for setting a shift command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the random number shift process is terminated. If it is not in any RB state in step S2403, the process for random number shift ends.

<AT mode transition lottery table>
As described above, the AT mode transition lottery uses the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the third stop OFF operation of each game. For the AT mode transition lottery, in addition to lottery random number information as the AT counter C, lottery results of each game and an AT mode transition lottery table are used. Therefore, the relationship between the value of the AT counter C and the lottery result of each game will be described below with reference to FIG.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the lottery result of each game is associated with the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery. Specifically, for example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, if the lottery result of the game is a strong cherry, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "0" to "14". When the lottery result of the game is weak cherry, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode shift lottery is "0" to "3". Further, when the lottery result of the game is strong watermelon, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode shift lottery is "500" to "529", and when the lottery result of the game is weak watermelon, AT mode The value of the AT counter C that wins the transfer lottery is "500" to "514".

That is, for example, when the AT mode shift lottery is performed in a game in which "3" is acquired as the AT counter C and the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE, the lottery result of the game is strong. If it is a cherry or a weak cherry, you win the AT mode shift lottery. On the other hand, even if the AT mode transition lottery is performed in a game in which "3" is similarly stored in the execution area AE as the AT counter C, the lottery result of the game will be strong watermelon or weak. If it is a watermelon, it will not be won in the AT mode shift lottery.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing whether or not the AT mode shift lottery is won based on the value of the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f and the lottery result of each game.

For example, in FIG. 58(a), random number shift processing is performed at the start of the game, "751" is shifted to the execution area AE of the lottery information storage area 106f as the AT counter C, and "751" is shifted to the first storage area RE1. "600" is shifted to the second storage area RE2, "324" is shifted to the second storage area RE2, "40" is shifted to the third storage area RE3, and "99" is shifted to the fourth storage area RE4. Note that the random numbers in the fifth storage area RE5 are cleared by performing the random number shift process as described above. If the lottery result of the game is normal replay, "751" as the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is not associated with normal replay (Fig. 57). The mode transition lottery will not be won.

FIG. 58(b) shows the start of the next game in FIG. 58(a), and the value of the AT counter C in each storage area shown in FIG. It shows the state shifted to . In FIG. 58(b), at the end of the game in FIG. 58(a) (when the third stop OFF operation is performed), a new AT counter C is obtained, and the AT counter C is stored in the fifth storage area RE5. , it is shifted to the fourth storage area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in FIG. 58(b).

When the lottery result of the game in FIG. 58(b) is a weak cherry, "600" as the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is not associated with a weak cherry. Therefore (FIG. 57), the AT mode shift lottery for this game is not won.

FIG. 58(c) shows the start of the game next to FIG. 58(b), and the AT counter C value in each storage area shown in FIG. 58(b) is further lowered by one. It shows the state shifted to the area. Also in FIG. 58(c), at the end of the game in FIG. 58(b) (at the time of the third stop OFF operation), a new AT counter C is obtained, and the AT counter C is stored in the fifth storage area RE5. , it is shifted to the fourth storage area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in FIG. 58(c).

When the lottery result of the game in FIG. 58(c) is strong watermelon, "324" as the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is not associated with strong watermelon. Therefore (FIG. 57), the AT mode shift lottery for this game is not won.

FIG. 58(d) shows the start of the game next to FIG. 58(c), and the value of the AT counter C in each storage area shown in FIG. It shows the state shifted to . In FIG. 58(d), at the end of the game in FIG. 58(c) (when the third stop OFF operation is performed), a new AT counter C is obtained, and the AT counter C is stored in the fifth storage area RE5. , it is shifted to the fourth storage area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in FIG. 58(d).

When the lottery result of the game in FIG. 58(d) is a strong cherry, "40" as the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section. Although it is not associated with strong cherries in the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, it is associated with strong cherries (Fig. 57), so if the game is in CZ mode, the AT mode transition of this game Lottery wins.

Here, the AT mode transition lottery for each game in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(d) is performed with the AT counter C acquired in the game prior to the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as described above. , using the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed and the AT mode transition lottery table. That is, the AT counter C used for the AT mode transition lottery for each game in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(d) is basically the AT counter C obtained five games before. Therefore, for example, even if the game five games before the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE in the game of FIG. If so, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C is won. Conversely, even if the game five games before the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE in the game of FIG. If not, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C is not won.

Further, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery for each game can be performed during the first RB state among the RB states. Therefore, for example, in a situation where "777" is acquired as the AT counter C associated with the 3rd hand in the RB during the advantageous section, the AT counter C is given to the AT mode transition lottery. If it is possible to shift to the 1 RB state, or if it is possible to continue the 1 RB state until the AT counter C is given to the AT mode transition lottery, the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed will be the first among RBs. Winning the AT mode transition lottery on the condition that three roles are won. Then, even if it is possible to shift to the first RB state or continue the first RB state as described above, if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed does not win the third role in the RB. , will not win the AT mode transition lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the AT mode shift lottery is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery result of the current game, the game for obtaining the AT counter C and the game for using the AT counter C are used. Innovative playability using the gap between is realized.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, not only the AT mode transition lottery for each game, but also the AT mode transition lottery is performed when the RB state ends. The configuration will be described below.

<End determination processing>
First, the end determination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The end determination process is a process executed in each game during the bonus state in the bonus state process (FIG. 26) (step S618).

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not any small combination has been won in the current game. As already explained, in the CB state, any one of the 1st minor winning combination to the 41st minor winning combination is established by winning any one of the CB medium and small winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4. On the other hand, in the first RB state and the second RB state, any of RB medium strong cherry, RB 1st hand, RB 2nd hand and RB 3rd hand is won. FIG. 61 shows the relationship between the percentage of winning combinations in each RB state and the set value.

In the first RB state, as shown in FIG. 61(a), regardless of the set value, the percentage of winning hands in the first RB state is the same, and 50% for RB medium-strong cherry. , winning the first role in RB with a probability of 20%, winning the second role in RB with a probability of 15%, and winning the third role in RB with a probability of 15%. As already explained, if you win the RB mid-high cherry, it is possible to establish the 28th minor role winning and the 32nd minor role winning to the 35th minor role winning, and if you win, 15 medals will be paid out. is played (2 bet game). However, the RB medium-strong cherry is a result that may be missed, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, none of the small wins will be established in the game in which the RB medium-strong cherry is won, and in this case, No medals will be paid out. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S2501.

If the 1st role in RB is won, it is possible to establish the 1st minor role, and if the 2nd role in RB is won, either the 1st minor role or the 39th minor role will be established. If the 3rd role in the RB wins, it is possible to achieve either the 1st minor role winning or the 40th minor role winning. Also, 15 medals are paid out (2-bet game). These RB 1st hand, RB 2nd hand and RB 3rd hand are all results that do not fail, and regardless of the operation timing or the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the small A win is established and 15 medals are paid out.

That is, in the first RB state, a 15-card payout combination (RB medium strong cherry) that can cause a dropout is won with a probability of 50%, and a 15-card payout combination that cannot cause a dropout (RB 1st combination, RB 1st combination). 2 role, 3rd role in RB) with a probability of 50%.

In the second RB state, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the percentage of winning combinations in the second RB state differs depending on the set value. More specifically, the ratio of RB medium-strong cherry and RB 1st hand differs depending on the setting value, and in setting 1, RB medium-strong cherry is won with a probability of 34%, and RB with 1st hand 36% probability. On the other hand, with setting 6, there is a 50% chance of winning the RB medium-strong cherry, and a 20% probability of winning the first role in the RB. increase, and the percentage of winning the first prize among RBs decreases. In this case, the sum of the proportions of the RB middle-strong cherry and the RB first hand is set so as not to differ depending on the set value. That is, in the second RB state, 70% of the winning chances are RB Medium Strong Cherry or RB 1st Role, 15% of winning is RB 2nd Role, and 15% of RB 3rd Role is winning. win the role.

That is, in the second RB state, a 15-card payout combination (RB medium strong cherry) that can cause a dropout is won with a probability of 34% to 50%, and a 15-card payout combination that cannot cause a dropout (RB 1st combination, 2nd role in RB, 3rd role in RB) with a probability of 66% to 50%, and the percentage is different from that in the 1st RT state.

By the way, as already explained, although the 1st minor winning combination in the RB, the 2nd winning combination in the RB, and the 3rd winning combination in the RB can all be established as the 1st minor winning combination, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the right reel 32R, the RB The 39th small winning combination is established in the middle 2nd combination, and the 40th small combination winning is established in the RB third combination. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp which of the 1st RB hand, the 2nd RB hand, and the 3rd RB hand was won.

If it is determined in step S2501 that one of the small wins has been won, then in step S2502 processing is performed to subtract the number of medals to be paid out in the current game from the counter for the remaining number of payouts. As already explained, the remaining payout number counter is a counter to which a numerical value corresponding to the maximum payout number is input when a bonus is won. be.

After the processing of step S2502 is executed, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the remaining payout number counter is 0 or less and the bonus upper limit payout number has been reached. If the maximum number of payouts has been reached, it is determined in step S2504 whether the current bonus is in either the first RB state or the second RB state. That is, if it is in the CB state, a negative determination is made in step S2504. If it is in the first RB state or the second RB state, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT mode winning flag or the AT notification flag is set means that the first RB or the second RB is won after winning the AT mode transition lottery and before shifting to the AT mode, or that the first RB or second RB is won during the AT mode. For example, when the first RB or the second RB is won. If neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT notification flag is set, in step S2506, the AT lottery process is executed at the time of termination, and then the termination determination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in any one of steps S2501, S2503, and S2504, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2505, the end determination process is terminated without performing the end AT lottery process.

<AT lottery process at the end>
In the end AT lottery process, as shown in FIG. 60, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the winning flag during the first RB is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, in the present embodiment, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery for each game is permitted in the first RB state among the RB states, and the winning flag during the first RB is any one of the first RB states. This flag is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the game. If not set, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table for RB termination from the various table storage area 105a is executed. Then, in step S2603, a process of acquiring a random number for AT mode transition lottery is executed. The process of step S2603 is the same as the process of step S909 of the AT lottery process (FIG. 33), and acquires the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE of the lottery information storage area 106f. That is, the process of step S2603 is a process of acquiring a random number (AT counter C) for the AT mode transition lottery acquired before the game in which the RB state end condition is satisfied and the RB state ends.

In subsequent step S2604, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of RB obtained in step S2602 and the pre-acquired AT counter C grasped in step S2603. Here, as shown in FIG. 62, the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of RB is such that the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is the type of RB state, the result of the current game, and the setting value. Regardless, a common value is set. That is, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of the 1st RB state shown in FIG. 62(a), RB medium-strong cherry, RB 1st hand, RB 2nd hand, and RB that can be won in the 1st RB state The value of the AT counter C that is associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of which of the middle and third roles ended the first RB state, and regardless of the set value that has been set. It is "0" to "499". In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of the second RB state shown in FIG. 62(b), RB medium-strong cherry, RB first hand, RB second hand and RB that can be won in the second RB state The value of the AT counter C that is associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of which of the middle and third roles ended the second RB state, and regardless of the setting value that has been set. It is "0" to "499". Therefore, if the value of the AT counter C obtained in advance in the game before the RB state end game is "0" to "499", regardless of the type of RB state, the lottery result of the end game, and the set value. First, you will be elected in the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB.

In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the result of the transition lottery in step S2604 was a winning result, and if not winning, the AT lottery process at the end is terminated as it is.

If the winning flag in the first RB is set in step S2601, the winning flag in the first RB is cleared in step S2606. Then, after executing the process of step S2606, and when it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB is won in step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2607, the AT notification flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S2608. After setting the AT mode winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT lottery process at the end of the process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RB state ends, regardless of the outcome of the game in which the end condition is satisfied, the AT obtained in the game prior to the game in which the end condition is satisfied An AT mode transition lottery using the counter C is performed. Therefore, like the AT mode transition lottery using the lottery results of each game that is performed at normal times as described above, the lottery result associated with the acquired AT counter C is obtained, and the AT mode transition lottery is won. Unlike the configuration, when the end condition of the RB state is satisfied in the game associated with the acquired AT counter C, the AT mode shift win is won.

<Processing for pending display>
Next, a description will be given of game characteristics using the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed at the end of the RB as described above. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing processing for pending display. The pending display process is a process executed in step S2206 of the effect setting process (FIG. 52) at the time of all stop in the display control device 81. FIG.

In step S2701, it is determined whether an AT command has been received from the main controller 101 or not. As already explained, the AT command is a command that is set to be output under the condition that the game to be ended this time is in the RB state in the random number acquisition processing that is executed at the time of the third stop OFF operation at the end of the game. In addition to information corresponding to the AT counter C value acquired this time, information corresponding to the AT counter C values stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE5 is included. If the AT command has not been received in step S2701, the pending display process is terminated.

If an AT command has been received, in step S2702, based on the information contained in the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C corresponding to each of the storage areas RE1 to RE5 is transferred to the pending information storage area of the RAM 183. 183c. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, the holding information storage area 183c on the display control device 81 side has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106f on the main control device 101 side. It has storage areas (first storage area to fifth storage area) capable of storing information on the counter C, and an execution area for storing information on the AT counter C of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery. have. In step S2702, based on the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C in the first storage area RE1 on the main controller 101 side is stored in the first storage area of the information storage area 183c for suspension, and then stored in the second storage area. The information of the AT counter C in the area RE2 is stored in the second storage area of the pending information storage area 183c, and the information of the AT counter C in the fifth storage area RE5 is stored in the fifth storage area of the pending information storage area 183c. Then, the information of the AT counter C in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area 183c.

After the process of step S2702 is performed, the process for performing a pending display on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed in steps S2703 to S2708.

Here, the pending display performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 64( a ), a reserved display area Dr is set in the lower part as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display section 65 . The suspension display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit suspension display areas Dr1 to Dr5 as the maximum number of AT counters C stored in the suspension information storage area 183c are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the reserved display area Dr includes a first unit reserved display area Dr1, a second unit reserved display area Dr2, a third unit reserved display area Dr3, a fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, and a fifth unit reserved display area. Dr5 is set. In addition to the pending display area Dr, on the left side of the pending display area Dr (on the left side of the first unit pending display area Dr1) is displayed the pending display of the AT counter C stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area 183c. An execution display area Dp for performing is set. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than the unit reservation display areas Dr1 to Dr5, and the reservation display for the AT mode transition lottery of the game and the AT mode transition lottery after the game. A player can clearly distinguish this from the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the special image table for holding display displayed in the execution display area Dp and the holding display area Dr, the first special image P1 to the third special image P3 and the AT counter C are associated with each other. The first special image P1 to the third special image P3 suggest the contents of the winning result of the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB based on the corresponding AT counter C. Specifically, when the AT counter C is "0" to "399", the first special image P1 is displayed as a suggestion of winning the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB. attached. Further, when the AT counter C is "400" to "599", the second special image P2 is displayed as a suggestion that the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB may or may not be won. are mapped so that Then, when the AT counter C is "600" to "999", the third special image P3 is displayed as a suggestion that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is not won. It is

These special images P1 to P3 are set so that the displayed characters, colors, etc. are different so that the player can distinguish between them. In the figure, the first special image P1 is displayed as a circle character, the second special image P2 is displayed as a triangle character, and the third special image P3 is displayed as a cross character. The characters and display modes of the special images P1 to P3 are arbitrary as long as the player can identify the special images P1 to P3.

Returning to the description of the pending display process, in step S2704, a corresponding special image is selected from the special image table acquired in step S2703 and the value of the AT counter C. FIG. Then, in step S2705, the image data of the selected special image is stored together with the AT counter C in the storage area for storing the AT counter C acquired at this acquisition opportunity. More specifically, the image data corresponding to the selected special image is read out from the ROM 182, and the image data and the value of the AT counter C acquired this time are stored in the empty area of the holding information storage area 183c with the highest number. Store in a young free area (basically the fifth storage area).

In the following step S2706, it is determined whether or not the special image is already being displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. The process of step S2706 is a process of determining whether or not the display condition for the pending display is already satisfied. If the display condition for pending display is satisfied and the special image is being displayed, the process advances to step S2708, and the special image corresponding to the image data stored in step S2705 is displayed in the corresponding unit pending display area ( Basically, the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so as to be displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5). If the AT command has not been received in step S2701 and the RB state is not in effect, or if the special image is not being displayed in step S2706, the pending display processing ends.

That is, even in the RB state, if the display conditions for the special image (holding display) are not met, the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is selected and the image data is stored. Only processing is done.

<Processing for hold shift>
Next, the pending shift process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pending shift process is a process executed in step S1802 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 48) when the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. FIG.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. As described above, the shift command is a random number shift process that is executed when the number of bets in the game to be started this time in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) is a specific prescribed number according to the game state. This command is output from the main controller 101 on the condition that it is in the middle. If no shift command has been received, the pending shift processing is terminated without performing the shift processing of the pending display data from step S2802 onward.

If the shift time command has been received, in step S2802, a process of clearing the pending display data displayed in the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, a process of clearing the information of the AT counter C stored in the execution area corresponding to the execution display area Dp in the suspension information storage area 183c and the image data for the special image as the suspension display is performed. conduct. Then, in step S2803, a process of shifting the pending display data to be displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1 to the data-cleared execution area is performed. More specifically, the information of the AT counter C stored in the first storage area corresponding to the first unit reserved display area Dr1 in the reserved information storage area 183c and the image data for the special image as the reserved display are stored in the above-described to the execution area of

In the subsequent step S2804, a process of shifting the pending display data displayed in each unit pending display area to a lower storage area is performed. More specifically, the information of the AT counter C stored in the second storage area corresponding to the second unit reserved display area Dr2 and the image data for the special image as the reserved display are shifted to the first storage area, Clear the information of the AT counter C and the image data in the 2 storage areas, and then, in order, the 3rd storage area→the 2nd storage area, the 4th storage area→the 3rd storage area, the 5th storage area→the 4th storage area, and so on. , shift the data in the storage area corresponding to each unit reserved display area. In this case, only data in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth unit reserved display region Dr4 is shifted from the fifth storage area corresponding to the fifth unit reserved display region Dr5, and new data is not shifted. can't break That is, the data in the fifth storage area is cleared, and the fifth storage area becomes an empty area in which no data is stored.

In step S2805, the remaining number of payouts is grasped from the upper limit number of payouts in the RB state and the current number of payouts, and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of payouts is 65 or less. As described above, in the RB state, the maximum number of payouts is set to 110, and in each game, 15 medals can be paid out regardless of which role is won. It is set so that the condition for ending the RB state is satisfied and the RB state ends when 15 medals are paid out eight times. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the number of medals is 65 or less is a situation in which 15 medals have already been paid out three times, and the RB state can end within five games remaining, including the current game. It can be said that it is a process of determining whether or not there is.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the number of images is 65 or less, in step S2806, processing for displaying the special image corresponding to the image data of each area shifted in steps S2801 to S2806 in the corresponding display area is performed. conduct. That is, the special image corresponding to the image data shifted to the execution area is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the special image corresponding to the image data shifted to each storage area is displayed in each unit reserved display area. That is, the process of step S2805 is a process of determining whether or not the display condition for the special image (holding display) in the RB state is met. The display condition for the special image is established when the situation is such that the game can be finished within five remaining games.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the display condition for the special image is not satisfied, the hold shift processing ends. Also, after each special image is displayed in step S2806, in step S2807, processing for updating the game to be finished is performed, and then the pending shift processing is terminated.

<Updating the game scheduled to end>
As already explained, in the RB state, if any one of the 1st RB hand, the 2nd RB hand and the 3rd RB hand is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 While a small winning combination of 15 payouts is established, when the RB medium-strong cherry is won, a small winning combination of 15 payouts may or may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. occurs. Therefore, even if it is determined in step S2805 that the RB state can end within 5 games, more than 5 games may be played before the end, depending on the lottery result of each game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44. You may need a number. In other words, the game in which the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB may be changed depending on the progress of the game, such as the lottery result of each game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, in step S2807, the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is scheduled to be performed at the end of the RB is set as the game to be finished, and the game to be finished is updated according to the progress of the game.

66(a), in step S2901, the current remaining number of payouts is input to the calculation counter SC provided in the counter area 183b of the RAM 183. process. Then, in step S2902, processing for subtracting the maximum number of payouts per game (15) from the calculation counter SC is performed. In this embodiment, 15 medals are paid out for each winning combination in each game in the RB state. For example, 9 medals or 3 medals are paid out. In such a configuration, it is preferable that 9 is subtracted from the calculation counter SC in step S2902.

In the subsequent step S2903, a process of adding 1 to the end counter EC provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. The end counter EC corresponds to the game scheduled to end. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether or not the calculation counter SC has become less than 0 based on the result of the processing in step S2902. If it is 0 or more, the process returns to step S2902, and the maximum number of payouts is again subtracted from the calculation counter SC, and addition processing of the end counter EC is performed. If the calculation counter SC is less than 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, and the process proceeds to step S2905.

In step S2905, a process of displaying the end schedule corresponding to the end counter EC is performed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66(b), it is determined whether the special image displayed in any of the display area for execution Dp and the unit reservation display areas Dr1 to Dr5 corresponds to the scheduled end game. As a display suggesting that, an end schedule display EP is displayed at a location (above) corresponding to the display of the execution display area Dp and each of the unit holding display areas Dr1 to Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. For example, when the end counter EC is 1 and the scheduled end game is the current game, the end scheduled display EP is displayed above the special image corresponding to the special image in the execution display area Dp. Further, for example, when the end counter EC is 4 and the game to be ended is four games including the current game, the special image of the third unit reserved display area Dr3 is made to correspond to the end above the special image. A schedule display EP is displayed.

In step S2905, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the end schedule display EP at the location corresponding to the end counter EC when the affirmative determination is made in step S2904. Then, in step S2906, after clearing the calculation counter SC and the end counter EC to 0, the updating process of the game to be finished is finished.

<Relationship between scheduled end game and AT counter>
Next, how the game to be finished is changed according to the game result of each game in the RB state will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. FIG.

In FIG. 67, when a game is started in which the number of remaining payouts in the RB state is 65 as a result of the previous game, and the game can be finished within the remaining 5 games, the state at the start of the game is shown. showing. For example, in FIG. 67(a), a remaining payout number display ZHP displaying a number corresponding to the remaining payout number in the RB state is displayed as a predetermined area of the auxiliary display portion 65, for example, in the upper right corner. Further, in the auxiliary display section 65, a special image is displayed in the execution display area Dp and each of the unit reservation display areas Dr1 to Dr4. Each special image corresponds to the AT counter C and image data stored in each area. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the AT counter C in the execution area is "27", and the image data in this case is the image data of the first special image P1 (displayed as 1 in FIG. 67(c)). ) is stored, and in this case, the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp of FIG. 67(a). The AT counter C in the second storage area is "895", and the image data of the third special image P3 (displayed as 3 in FIG. 67(c)) is stored as the image data in this case. In this case, the third special image P3 is displayed in the second unit reserved display area Dr2 of FIG. 67(a). The AT counter C in the fourth storage area is "531", and the image data of the second special image P2 (displayed as 2 in FIG. 67(c)) is stored as the image data in this case. In this case, the second special image P2 is displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4 of FIG. 67(a).

The end schedule display EP is displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4 corresponding to 5 games after the current game including the current game. It is suggested that an AT mode transition lottery will be held at the end.

For example, if the lottery result of the current game is the 1st RB winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination is established as shown in FIG. At the end of the current game, advance acquisition of a new AT counter C is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "7", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the first special image P1 are stored in the fifth storage area. While being stored (steps S2702 to S2705), the first special image P1 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 at the end of the game.

FIG. 68 shows the state of the game following FIG.

That is, the AT counter C and the image data are shifted one by one from the areas shown in FIGS. The special images corresponding to Dr4 are also shifted one by one to lower regions. For example, the AT counter C (601) and image data (3) stored in the first storage area in FIG. 67 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. It is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In addition, the completion schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 cards were paid out in the previous game, the completion schedule display EP is displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4 in FIG. , to a location corresponding to the third unit reserved display area Dr3.

For example, if the lottery result of the current game is the 1st RB winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination is established as shown in FIG. Then, at the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is obtained in advance, and as shown in FIG. , the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored, and the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 when the game is over.

FIG. 69 shows a situation in which RB medium-strong cherry is won under the condition that the number of remaining payouts is 20 at the start of the game. That is, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the remaining payout number display ZHP indicates "20", the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the second special image P1 is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1. A special image P2 is displayed, and an end schedule display EP is displayed in correspondence with the first unit reserved display area Dr1. As shown in FIGS. 69(b) and 69(c), each area of the holding information storage area 183c stores corresponding AT counter C information and image data information.

In such a situation, the RB medium-strong cherry is won, and as shown in FIG. 69(d), if the 28th minor winning combination is established, the number of remaining payouts is reduced from 20 to 5. At the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is acquired in advance, and as shown in FIG. 69E, if the AT counter C acquired this time is "815", , the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored, and the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 when the game is over.

FIG. 70 shows the state of the game following FIG.

That is, the AT counter C and the image data are shifted one by one from the areas shown in FIGS. The special images corresponding to Dr4 are also shifted one by one to lower regions. For example, the AT counter C (531) and image data (2) stored in the first storage area in FIG. 69 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. It is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In addition, the completion schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 coins were paid out in the previous game, the completion schedule display EP is reserved for the first unit in FIG. 70(a). It has moved from a location corresponding to the display area Dr1 to a location corresponding to the execution display area Dp. That is, it indicates that the RB state ends when 15 coins are paid out in the current game.

In such a situation, if the RB medium-strong cherry is won and the RB medium-strong cherry is missed as shown in FIG. In this case, the RB state is not ended in this game, and the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB is not performed. That is, the AT mode shift lottery using the AT counter C (531) stored in the execution area corresponding to the current game is not performed. By the way, as shown in FIG. 72, if the RB mid-strong cherry is not missed in the game and, for example, the 28th minor winning combination is established, 15 medals will be paid out in this game, and the remaining number of payouts will occur. is changed from 5 to 0, and the condition for ending the RB state is established. In this case, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C (531) stored in the execution area in the current game. However, it is not won in the AT mode transition lottery (see FIG. 62).

Even if the RB medium-strong cherry is missed as described above, a new AT counter C is acquired in advance at the end of the current game as shown in FIG. 70(e). That is, the AT counter C is acquired at the end of the game regardless of the game lottery result or game result (winning combination, presence/absence of failure, operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44). As shown in FIG. 70(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "691", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored in the fifth storage area. , the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 at the end of the game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 71, when 15 coins are paid out in the game subsequent to the game in FIG. 70, an AT mode transition lottery is performed. That is, the AT counter C and image data are shifted one by one from the areas shown in FIGS. The special images corresponding to Dr4 are also shifted one by one to lower regions. For example, AT counter C(7) and image data (1) stored in the first storage area in FIG. 70 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. In addition, the completion schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 coins were not paid out in the previous game, the completion schedule display EP is displayed as an execution target in FIG. 71(a). It remains displayed at the location corresponding to the display area Dp. That is, even in this game, the RB state ends when 15 coins are paid out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(d), when the first minor winning combination is established, the number of remaining payouts is reduced from 5 to 0, and the condition for ending the RB state is established. In this case, an AT mode transition lottery is performed at the end of the RB, and an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C(7) stored in the execution area corresponding to the current game. Incidentally, when the AT mode shift lottery using the AT counter C(7) is performed, the AT mode shift win is won (see FIG. 62).

As shown in FIG. 71(e), the AT counter C is obtained regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not, in addition to the lottery result or game result of the current game. That is, at the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is acquired in advance, and as shown in FIG. , the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the first special image P1 are stored, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 when the game ends.

<AT mode transition lottery during RB>
As described above, the first RB does not have a set difference in the winning probability, and the lottery table of each game in the first RB state does not have a set difference in the probability of winning each combination. On the other hand, there is a set difference between the winning probability of the second RB and the probability of each game in the second RB state.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), when the first RB is won at the timing of ta1, an AT mode transition lottery can be performed in the winning game of the first RB. The first game in the first RB state starts at timing ta2, the first game ends at timing ta3, the second game in the first RB state starts at timing ta4, and the second game starts at timing ta5. , the AT mode transition lottery for each game is executed in the lottery result handling process at the start of the game as described above, so the AT mode transition lottery for the first game is performed at timing ta2. The AT mode shift lottery for the game is performed at the timing of ta4. This AT mode transition lottery is based on the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE and the lottery results of the current game (RB medium strong cherry, RB 1st role, RB 2nd role, RB 3rd role) (Fig. 57).

In other words, the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of which minor winning combination is established at ta3 or ta5, the number of medals paid out, the number of remaining payouts in the RB state, and the like. Therefore, at ta7 when the 6th game started at ta6 ends, or at ta10 when the 9th game started at ta8 ends, even if, for example, an RB mid-strong cherry is missed, the sixth game or The AT mode transition lottery for the ninth game is performed at timings ta6 and ta8.

In the 10th game started at the timing of ta10, when a minor win is established at the timing of ta11 and the end condition of the first RB state is satisfied based on the winning, an AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB is performed. This AT mode shift lottery is performed regardless of the lottery result or the game result of the game in which the end condition is satisfied. That is, if any one of "0 to 499" is stored as the AT counter C in the execution area AE in the tenth game, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and one of "500" to "999" is stored. If so, it will not win the AT mode shift lottery.

In addition, FIG. 73(a) shows that none of the AT mode transition lotteries before the AT mode transition lottery at ta11 was won. In this case, at the end of the RB state of ta11, AT mode winning notification is performed (see FIG. 74(b)).

On the other hand, FIG. 73(b) shows a case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in each game during the first RB state before the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is performed. That is, tb1 to tb5 are the same as ta1 to ta5, and after winning the first RB, the first RB state starts, and AT mode transition lottery is performed in each game (tb1, tb2, tb4). Then, when the AT mode transition lottery for the sixth game started at tb6 is won, execution of the AT mode transition lottery thereafter is restricted (tb8, tb10, tb11). In this case, neither the AT mode transition lottery at the start of the game nor the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is performed.

However, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won at tb6, AT mode winning notification is not performed in the game at tb6. In addition, even if the AT mode shift lottery is won, the execution of the holding display using the special image of each game in the RB state, the end schedule display EP, etc. is continued as it is. At tb11, at the timing when the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB can be performed, at tb6, the winning notification of the AT mode won is performed. The form of notification of winning the AT mode is shown in FIG. 74(b), which is common to the form of notification in the case of winning the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB in FIG. 73(a). In other words, the player determines whether the AT mode transition lottery is won in any of the games in the first RB state, or whether the AT mode transition lottery is won based on the satisfaction of the conditions for ending the first RB state. It cannot be identified from the notification execution timing and notification mode.

FIG. 74(a) shows the AT mode transition lottery in the case of the second RB state.

As described above, in the second RB, execution of the AT mode is restricted not only when the game is won, but also in each game during the second RB state. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed at the start timings (tc2, tc4, tc6, tc8, tc10) of each game in the second RB state as well as the game in which the second RB is won at the timing of tc1. Of course, even at the end of each game (tc3, tc5, tc7, tc9), the AT mode shift lottery based on the lottery results and game results of the game is not performed. However, at the timing of tc11 when the conditions for ending the second RB state are met, an AT mode transition lottery at the time of RB end is performed. The AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is executed regardless of the lottery result of the game started at tc10 or the game result at the time of winning at tc11. An AT mode transition lottery will be held. The drawing shows a case where the AT mode transition lottery at tc11 is won, and in this case, the AT mode winning notification of FIG. 74(b) is performed at tc11.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In addition to obtaining in advance the AT counter C used for the AT mode transition lottery, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by satisfying the RB state end condition, so the success or failure of the end condition has already been acquired. It is possible to perform a game such as adjusting the relationship with the AT counter C, and it is possible to create a new game feature during the RB state.

In this case, the termination condition of the RB state is that the upper limit number of sheets has been paid out, and as a result of winning during the RB state, an RB medium-strong cherry that can be missed depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to adjust the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed even if the RB medium-strong cherry is missed in relation to the AT counter C. Also, if a selection is made to cause a dropout, it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at an operation timing at which the dropout can occur. In this way, by adopting a configuration that allows moderate intervention in the AT mode transition lottery, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

On the other hand, if the winning combination in the RB state is the 1st combination in RB, the 2nd combination in RB, or the 3rd combination in RB, the first minor combination will be won without any room for intervention by the player. To establish. In this way, in adjusting the termination condition of the RB state, since the possibility of adjustment differs depending on the game lottery result, the It is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming too large.

Furthermore, in the second RB state, in the second RB state, a set difference is provided between the winning probability of the medium-strong cherry in the RB and the winning probability of the first hand in the RB. becomes. By doing so, it is possible to create a set difference in the probability of winning the AT mode transition without providing a set difference in the AT mode transition lottery itself. Even if the set value is the same, the payout rate will be different between the case where the set value is not set, and the diversification of the payout rate by the set value can be more preferably achieved.

Regarding the set difference, there is no set difference in the rate of transition to the first RB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the result that triggers the winning of the first RB state, and the AT mode is set during the first RB state. In contrast to a configuration in which a lottery for transition is performed, a set difference is provided in the rate of transition to the second RB state, and a configuration is provided in which an AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the result that triggers the winning of the second RB state, and The AT mode transition lottery is not performed during the second RB state. In addition, since the AT lottery process at the end is performed at the end of any RB, the AT lottery process at the end is also performed in the second RB state, thereby providing an opportunity to win the second RB state. It is possible to make the player think that the AT mode transition lottery is being performed even in the result, or that the AT mode transition lottery is being performed even in the second RB state, and attention is paid to the game that is the target of these. degree can be suitably increased.

In particular, when the AT mode shift lottery is performed during the RB state, the result is collectively notified at the end of the RB. It becomes difficult to understand whether it is time or not, and thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the AT mode transition lottery was actually performed during the RB state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the target game, and to draw more attention to the RB state ending game.

Since the AT mode transition lottery is not performed during the second RB state as described above, the ending game in the RB state is adjusted according to the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game in which execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. A novel game property is realized, such as adjusting the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

In this case, in the first RB state, the AT mode transition lottery can be performed when the RB medium high cherry is won. It can also be a game such as adjusting the game in which is played. In this way, by making the player think that the player's own operation has a great influence on the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, even if the end game of the second RB state is adjusted during the second RB state, if the adjustment is made using the RB medium-strong cherry, either 15 medals or 0 medals will be paid out. Therefore, the profit of the game is greatly different, and the price of the adjustment is large. In other words, by allowing the player to choose whether to adjust the end game even if the profit of the game is lowered, the player is made to consider the balance with the profit from the AT mode transition lottery that will be received after that, and You can make it more interesting.

Further, since the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted during the second RB state, in the configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance, the AT mode at the end of the RB state in a game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted The AT counter C used for the transfer lottery is acquired. By doing so, even in a game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, interest in the AT mode transition lottery can be prevented from diminishing, and the degree of attention to the AT mode transition lottery can be made more suitable. can be increased to

In particular, when the AT counter C is acquired, the setting value and the lottery result of the acquired game are configured so as not to affect each game without giving a negative impression that it cannot be expected because it is a low setting or because it often appears. Interest can be drawn to the equally acquired AT counter C.

In this way, although the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the setting value or the lottery result of the acquired game, the end game in the RB state may change depending on the setting value or the lottery result. While not excessively affecting the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to allow the influence of the set value to some extent.

Moreover, while making it possible to adjust the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed before and after the end game of the RB state depending on the lottery result of the obtained game, etc., the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB reflects the result of the end game. done without being done. That is, whether the game result of the RB state end game is RB medium-strong cherry or RB 1st hand, whether the AT mode shift lottery is appropriate or not is determined only by the AT counter C. By doing so, while the AT mode transition lottery is basically performed by combining the game lottery result and the AT counter C, the game lottery result is not determined in the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB. The result of the game during the RB state is the value of the AT counter C in the RB end game, and so on. Therefore, the interest in one AT mode transition lottery can be dispersed over a plurality of games, and it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention paid to the game.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the display conditions for the pending display during the RB state are different from those in the first embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the pending display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the processing after it is determined that the special image is not being displayed is different from that described above. That is, the processing of steps S3001 to S3007 is the same as the processing of steps S2701 to S2707, and based on the received AT command, the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the corresponding special image are stored in the corresponding area. process. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the special image is being displayed. If it is determined that the special image is being displayed, the special image corresponding to the AT command acquired this time is displayed in the fifth unit in step S3007. After performing the process of displaying in the reserved display area Dr5, this reserved display process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the special image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3008 in this modification. In step S3008, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game serves as a lottery trigger to determine whether or not to perform a hold display. In this modification, the trigger for the execution lottery for the holding display is set as RB medium-strong cherry. That is, in step S3008, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is RB middle/high cherry. If the RB is medium-strong cherry, a holding display lottery process is executed in step S3009. In the pending display lottery process, a pending display lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to start the pending display.

As shown in FIG. 77, the pending display lottery table has a common winning probability regardless of the setting value in the first RB state, and is uniformly 20% in this modified example. That is, in the first RB state, the condition for starting the display for suspension is established in 20% of the games in which the RB medium-strong cherry is won. On the other hand, in the second RB state, the winning probability differs depending on the set value, setting 1 being the lowest winning probability and setting 6 being the highest winning probability. That is, in setting 1, the condition for starting the display for suspension is satisfied in 20% of the games in which the RB medium-strong cherry is won in the second RB state, and in setting 6, the starting condition is satisfied in 50%. In particular, in the second RB state, the winning probability of the RB medium-strong cherry is set so that the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win (Fig. 61), and the setting difference between the success or failure of the starting conditions for the display for holding is more pronounced. become a thing.

At step S3010, it is determined whether or not the winning is won in the holding display lottery process at step S3009. End the display processing. If a negative determination is made in step S3008 or step S3011, the pending display process is terminated.

By setting the pending display winning flag, the pending display is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 76, in the pending shift process in this modification, if it is determined in step S3105 that the number of remaining payouts is 65 or less, the pending display win flag is set in step S3106. Determine whether or not If it is not set, the pending shift processing is terminated. That is, in this case, regardless of the number of remaining payouts, the pending display is not performed. Therefore, the player cannot decide whether or not to postpone the ending game in the RB state. If the pending display winning flag is set in step S3106, the special image display processing is performed in step S3107, and the processing for updating the scheduled end game is performed in step S3108, followed by processing for pending shift. exit. The processing of steps S3101 to S3105 and steps S3107 to S3108 is the same as the processing of steps S2801 to S2807.

Thus, by generating randomness in the start game of the display for suspension, the display for suspension is used as a basis for determination in a game in which whether or not to postpone the end game in the RB state is determined by the display for suspension. The presence or absence of the game differs depending on the game result, thereby improving the fun of the game. In other words, in a situation where the pending display is not displayed, it is not possible to determine whether the end game in the RB state should be advanced or delayed, and it is necessary to determine whether or not to establish the prize when the RB medium-strong cherry is won. can't

However, if the winning of RB medium-strong cherry is not established, the number of increased medals in the RB state will be reduced by the number of bets in the game, so there is also the idea that it is better to establish the winning. On the other hand, in the first RB state, the longer the game is continued in the RB state, the more times the AT mode transition lottery is performed during the RB state. Then, it is preferable not to allow RB medium-strong cherry to win. In addition, even in the second RB state, the number of execution lotteries for the display for suspension increases, so in order to adjust the end game in the RB state from the display for suspension, it is better not to win the RB medium-strong cherry. preferable. Then, after the player selects whether the game is aimed at a substantial increase in medals or the game aimed at winning the AT mode transition, the player decides whether or not to cause a dropout when the RB medium-strong cherry is won. By doing so, the player's intervention in the game is encouraged, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, based on the above-described modified example 1, the number of holding displays to be displayed increases every time the holding display lottery process is won. That is, in the pending display process shown in FIG. 78, after the pending display lottery process is performed in step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the player wins the lottery process. In the case of winning, the pending display winning flag is set in step S3211, and then, in step S3212, a process of adding 1 to the display number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. End the process. The display number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of special images to be displayed. The processing of steps S3201 to S3211 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3011.

In the pending shift process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 79, if it is determined in step S3306 that the pending display winning flag is set, the value of the display counter is grasped in step S3307. , to specify the number of times the holding display lottery is won. Then, in step S3308, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the number of pending displays corresponding to the value of the display counter is performed. After that, in step S3309, the game scheduled to be finished is updated, and then the hold shift process is finished. Note that the processing in steps S3301 to S3306 and S3309 is the same as the processing in steps S3101 to S3106 and S3108.

For example, if the display counter is 1, the special image corresponding to the execution display area Dp is displayed, while no special image is displayed in each of the unit reserved display areas Dr1 to Dr5. Therefore, although the information corresponding to the result of the AT mode shift lottery when the RB state is terminated in the current game can be grasped from the display contents of the execution display area Dp, the RB state is terminated in the next game and thereafter. Information corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery cannot be grasped.

For example, if the special image displayed in the execution display area Dp is the first special image P1, it can be understood that it is preferable to end the RB state in the current game, and the third special image If it is P3, it can be understood that it is not preferable to end the RB state in this game. However, if the game this time is not RB medium-strong cherries, it is not possible to cause a dropout, so even if the third special image P3 is displayed, there is a scene where the RB state has to be ended in the game. .

On the other hand, when the special image displayed in the execution display area Dp is the second special image P2, if the RB state is ended in the current game, it is possible to win the AT mode transition lottery, but the You may be elected. Furthermore, even if the RB state is not ended in the current game, it is unknown whether the special image corresponding to the desired AT counter C will be displayed in the next game. In other words, in this case, even if the result of the current game is the RB mid-high cherry that can cause a dropout, it is left to the player's judgment as to whether or not to cause the dropout. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the timing of the holding display execution lottery is different from that in the first modified example. That is, in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when it is determined that the special image is not being displayed in step S3406, in step S3408, as a trigger for the holding display execution lottery, the current It is determined whether or not the winning of the RB middle/high cherry has been established as the game result of the game. If the prize has been won, a pending display lottery process is performed in step S3409. The processing of steps S3401 to S3411 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3011 except for the processing of step S3408.

That is, in this modification, even if the RB medium-strong cherry is won, the holding display execution lottery is not performed unless the winning is established. Therefore, in the game in which the RB medium-strong cherry is won, either the RB medium-strong cherry will be lost and the RB state will be extended, or the prize will be established and the lottery for the pending display will be received, and the medals in the RB state will be increased. The player will choose. By doing so, in the game in which the player selects whether to postpone the AT mode transition lottery performed in the ending game in the RB state, the options are increased and the interest in the game is improved.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the contents of the lottery result of the game in the RB state are different from those in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in the lottery results of each game in the first RB state of FIG. 81(a) and the lottery results of each game in the second RB state of FIG. In addition to the middle 1st hand, the RB 2nd hand and the RB 3rd hand, the lost result is included. That is, 10% of the games in the 1st RB state result in no win regardless of the operation order or timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and 20% to 30% of the games in the 2nd RB state. This is the out-of-range result. Therefore, even if the end schedule display EP is displayed corresponding to the execution display area Dp, and it is indicated that the end condition of the RB state is satisfied by causing the payout of 15 cards in the current game. If the lottery result of the current game is a losing result, the AT mode shift lottery cannot be received in the current game. Also, the first special image P1 is displayed not only in the execution display area Dp but also in the area corresponding to the end schedule display EP. Even if it is known that the AT mode transition lottery will be won, if the player loses midway, the end of the RB state is forcibly postponed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the amusement of the game during the RB state.

It should be noted that in the first RB state, the deviation result in this modified example is determined so that there is no set difference in the probability of the deviation result. In addition, in the second RB state, there is a setting difference between the RB medium-strong cherry and the result of losing. Moreover, it is easy to come off. In this way, by providing a setting difference, it is possible to predict the setting value while playing a game that adjusts the end game in the RB state. Although it is preferable that the result is a failure, it is preferable that the result is not a failure when predicting the set value (high setting prediction).

In addition, the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed at the end of the RB state is postponed due to the loss result during the RB state. It can be configured to influence the lottery. Then, since there is a set difference in the probability of the result of the failure, the AT mode transition can be made with a relatively simple configuration such as changing the ball payout rate by adjusting the winning probability of the failure result according to the set value. It becomes possible to influence the lottery by the set value.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, it is configured such that the pressing order bell can be won during the RB state. As described above, when the pressing order of the bell is won, depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 1st minor winning combination is established, the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, There may be cases where none of the small wins are established and the win is lost. In the RB state, since the game is played with two bets, 15 medals are paid out for winning the 1st small winning combination, and 14 medals are paid out for winning the 2nd to 26th small winning combinations. Occur. In other words, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, when the remaining number of medals to be paid out in the RB state is 15, if the first minor winning combination is established, the RB state ends in the game. Although the conditions are satisfied, in the case of winning the 2nd to 26th minor winnings or failing to win, it is possible to cause an event in which the conditions for ending the RB state are not satisfied in the game.

In this case, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the RB state may be notified, and for example, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination may be performed. In this way, there are cases where it is desired to adjust the end condition by paying out 15 medals, when it is desired to adjust the end condition by making 14 medals be paid out, or when it is desired to adjust by causing a dropout. , the player can refer to the notification of the pressing order. In a situation where it is advantageous if 14 medals are paid out, even if the push order notification corresponding to the 2nd to 26th minor wins is not generated, the push corresponding to the 1st minor win win As long as the order notification is generated, the player who wants to receive the payout of the 14 medals does not need to follow the order notification corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination.

Further, the presence or absence of the push order notification in the RB state may be configured to differ depending on whether the RB state is shifted to the advantageous section or the RB state is shifted to the normal section. That is, it may be configured such that when the transition is made to the normal section, the pushing order notification is not generated, and when the transition is made to the advantageous section, the pushing order notification is generated. By doing so, not only the advantage of increasing the number of medals to be paid out, but also the advantage of adjusting the number of games to be finished in the RB state can be obtained by using the push order notification. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new game properties.

Incidentally, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 82, the probability of winning the bell in the first RB state is the same as the probability of winning the bell in the second RB state. In the first RB state and the second RB state, the proportions of the 1st RB win, the 2nd RB win, and the 3rd RB win are different. More specifically, it is set so that it is easy to win the first RB combination in the first RB state, and it is easy to win the second RB combination in the second RB state. In the second RB state, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the first role in the RB and the less likely it is to win the third role in the RB, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win the first role in the RB and the third role in the RB. It is designed to make it easier to win. As described above, it is possible to determine which of the RB wins, the RB wins, the RB wins, and the RB wins, wins, depending on whether or not the first minor win wins. In this regard, in this modification, in predicting the set value by determining which result is won, it is determined whether the first minor winning combination is won, and whether it is the pushing order bell. is also required, and the difficulty of predicting the setting value is raised, and the interest in the game is improved.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a transition to a specific state with a different minor combination lottery probability can occur during the RB state.

That is, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 83(a), high JAC and low JAC are provided as prize modes. The "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. Then, a strong JAC prize is established, and a transition to the first JAC state occurs. The first JAC state is a state that ends when the first JAC game is played three times, and when the first JAC state ends, the game returns to the winning state. For example, when transitioning to the first JAC state during the RB state, the transition to the RB state occurs after the first JAC state ends.

The "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. Then, a weak JAC win is established, and a transition to the second JAC state occurs. The second JAC state is a state that ends when the second JAC game is played three times, and when the second JAC state ends, the game returns to the winning state. For example, when transitioning to the second JAC state during the RB state, the transition to the RB state occurs after the second JAC state ends.

FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing part of the lottery table for the first RB state and the second RB state. In addition, in this modified example, a common lottery table is used in the first RB state and the second RB state.

In this modification, the probability of winning the JAC when the index value IV = 59 is about 1/1.31, and the probability of losing is about 1/4.22. Other small wins (RB Medium Strong Cherry, RB 1st Win, RB 2nd Win, RB 3rd Win) will not be won. When a JAC is won, a strong JAC win flag and a weak JAC win flag are set, and winning in either the first JAC state or the second JAC state can occur. In this case, as a combination of winning symbols for the high JAC and the low JAC, common symbols are set for the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and different symbols are set for the left reel 32L. Therefore, when a JAC is won, it is possible to select which of the high JAC and low JAC wins to be established depending on the pattern aimed at the left reel 32L.

On the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "red bell" pattern and the "white bell" pattern are arranged so that the distance between them is within 4 patterns. It is possible to stop the symbol to be played at the effective position. On the other hand, on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol are arranged at positions separated by a maximum of 11 symbols. may or may not be able to stop at a valid position. That is, in a game in which a JAC is won, there is a case where winning is not established in either the strong JAC or the weak JAC, resulting in a loss. In addition, in this modification, the winning flag in the case of JAC winning is cleared unless winning is established in the winning game, and is not carried over to the next game.

When a strong JAC win is established, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 83(c), the first JAC state in which the first minor win as the first JAC minor win can be established with a high probability (approximately 1/1.31). transition to Also, when the weak JAC winning is established, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. It shifts to the second JAC state in which a prize can be established. In addition, in the 1st JAC state and the 2nd JAC state, it is designed not to win other than the 1st JAC minor role and the 2nd JAC minor role. 1/1).

In the first JAC state and the second JAC state, "3" is set as the prescribed number of bets, and the first JAC game and the second JAC game are executed in the 3-bet game. When the first JAC minor winning combination is won, the first minor winning combination can be established, and in this case, nine medals are paid out. When the 2nd JAC minor winning combination is won, the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination can be established, and in this case, 3 medals are paid out.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing end determination processing in this modification. The end determination process is a process performed in each game during the bonus in the bonus state process (FIG. 26).

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not any JAC winning has been established. When the JAC winning has been established, in step S3502, a process of inputting 3 to the JAC counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The JAC counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of JAC games played in the JAC state. In the subsequent step S3503, it is determined whether or not the JAC that won this time is a strong JAC.If it is a strong JAC, a process of setting a strong JAC flag is executed in a step S3504. In this case, the first JAC state is set, and the first JAC game using the lottery table for the first JAC state (FIG. 83(c)) is carried out from the next game. That is, the first JAC minor combination can be won three times with a high probability.

If it is determined in step S3503 that the win is a low JAC prize, processing for setting a low JAC flag is executed in step S3505. In this case, the second JAC state is set, and the second JAC game using the lottery table for the second JAC state (FIG. 83(d)) is carried out from the next game. That is, the second JAC minor combination can be won three times with a high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or if the processing in step S3504 or step S3505 has been executed, the process advances to step S3506. In step S3506, it is determined whether or not any minor winning combination has been won. If a prize has been won, in step S3507, a process of subtracting the payout number of medals won this time from the counter of the number of remaining payouts is executed. Then, in step S3508, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination won this time is any JAC small winning combination. As described above, in this modified example, in the RB state, no prize other than the JAC win is established, and in the JAC state, no prize other than the JAC win is established, so if the current bonus state is the RB state, step An affirmative determination is always made in S3508. Therefore, a negative determination in step S3508 means that the current bonus state is the CB state. After an affirmative determination is made in step S3508, processing for subtracting 1 from the JAC counter is executed in step S3509, and it is determined whether or not the JAC counter has become 0 in step S3510. When the JAC counter is 0, processing for clearing each JAC flag is performed in step S3511.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3506, S3508, and S3510, and if the process of step S3511 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3512. The processing of steps S3512 to S3515 is the same as the processing of steps S2503 to S2506. That is, as a process for ending the bonus state, when the RB state end condition is satisfied and the RB state is ended, the AT mode winning flag and the AT notification flag are not set. AT lottery processing is executed.

That is, in the RB state of this modified example, while repeatedly completing the first JAC state and the second JAC state, when 110 coins are paid out as the maximum number of payouts, an AT mode transition lottery is performed at the end of the RB. In the first JAC state, the first JAC game in which nine medals are paid out is played three times, and in the second JAC state, the second JAC game in which three medals are paid out is played three times. is established, a total of 27 medals will be paid out, and a total of 9 medals will be paid out if the weak JAC winning is established. In other words, if the strong JAC wins, an increase of 18 medals can be expected, but if the weak JAC wins, no medal increase will occur. As described above, the player can select between the strong JAC winning and the weak JAC winning according to the stop mode of the left reel 32L.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in this modification, the total number of payouts in the RB state is 90 or more, and if a strong JAC win is established, during the first JAC state based on the strong JAC win When the RB state can end in a short period of time, the display start condition for the pending display is satisfied, and the pending display is performed.

An example of the game flow during the RB state in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 85(a) shows an example of progression of the RB state especially when aiming to increase medals. That is, when a strong JAC prize is established in the 1st game in the RB state, and the 1st JAC game is executed in the 2nd to 4th games, the number of medals paid out is 27 at the end of the 4th game, and medals increase. The number is 15 sheets. By repeating this cycle of winning the JAC → winning the strong JAC → winning the first JAC game three times → winning the JAC, etc., when the winning of the strong JAC is established in the 17th game and the winning of the first JAC minor role is established in the 18th game. , the condition for ending the RB state is satisfied, and the RB state ends. The number of increased medals in this case is 63. Then, when the condition for ending the RB state is established, the AT mode transition lottery at the time of RB end is performed using the AT counter C of the 18th game.

FIG. 86(b) shows an example of progress in the case of postponing the end game in the RB state in relation to the acquired AT counter C. FIG. For example, after the third game in the first JAC state for the third time in the 12th game is completed, in the 13th game, a weak JAC prize is established instead of a strong JAC. In this case, the medal increase speed from the 14th game becomes slower than in the case of FIG. 85(a) (compared to the case where the strong JAC wins), and the number of medals paid out per game decreases. Also, after the 2nd JAC state based on the low JAC win is over, if the low JAC win instead of the high JAC win is established again in the 17th game, the 2nd JAC state based on the low JAC win ends in the 20th game. .

Then, in the twentieth game when the second JAC state based on the weak JAC win ends, the total number of payouts will be 99 and the remaining 11. In other words, if a strong JAC win is established, the condition for ending the RB state can be met during the first JAC game based on the strong JAC win (in the second first JAC game). In this case, in the next 21st game, if the first special image P1 corresponding to the AT mode transition winning is displayed in the second unit reservation display area Dr2, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB will be won. Become.

The figure shows a case where the JAC was not won in the 21st game, resulting in a loss. Then, even if the strong JAC is won in the next 22nd game, the RB state ends in the 24th game after 2 games. The RB state cannot be ended in the game corresponding to the first special image P1. In the figure, the special image in the 24th game shows that the third special image P3 corresponding to AT mode transition non-winning is displayed, and the special image in the next 25th game is AT mode transition. It shows that the first special image P1 corresponding to winning is displayed.

Therefore, even if JAC is won in the 22nd game, neither the strong JAC nor the weak JAC is won, causing a dropout, and by causing the strong JAC to win in the next 23rd game, the strong JAC The RB state ends in the 25th game, which is the second game in the first JAC state based on the winning. As a result, the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB can be received at the AT counter C corresponding to the first special image P1, and the AT mode shift win is won.

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT counter C is obtained in advance and the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the RB end game, it is possible to shift to the first JAC state and the second JAC state with different medal increase speeds during the RB state. With this configuration, it is possible to create game characteristics such as which JAC state to shift to from the relationship with the AT counter C acquired in advance, and win prizes in consideration of the number of increased medals in the winning game. Since it is necessary to make a selection that takes into account not only whether or not the game is to be played, but also the number of medals to be increased after the next game, it is possible to significantly improve the playability of the game in which the ending game in the RB state is adjusted.

It is possible to select by the player's operation which of the high JAC and low JAC wins is to be established, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the high JAC and the weak JAC from winning. The range of selection is widened in relation to the counter C, and it is possible to increase the fun of the game.

Since the result of not winning the JAC during the RB state and the result of not winning the JAC minor role even during the JAC game are provided, there are situations where the game does not go as planned by the player. It is possible not only to increase the difficulty of adjusting with , and to increase the interest of the game, but also to prevent the ball-out rate from becoming too high.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, in the configuration in which the AT counter C is obtained in advance, a new game feature is created using the difference in the AT mode transition lottery between the advantageous section and the normal section. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT lottery process is a process executed when the AT mode is not won in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 33).

In step S3601, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and it is a normal section, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the first specific combination set as the trigger combination for the AT mode transition lottery in the normal section. As the first specific role, in this embodiment, normal replay, high cherry, low cherry, high watermelon, low watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no question bell, and push order bell are set as shown in FIG. It is All of these results are results in which the winning probability is set to be the same regardless of various game states except for the bonus state, such as the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state and the third RT state. As shown in FIG. 87, in this embodiment, the winning probability of each result is different from that in the first embodiment. However, it is common to the first embodiment that the winning probability of the push order replay changes depending on the game state. These first specific hands are the results excluding pushing order replays, bonus double hands, and bonus single hands. In this embodiment, if the current lottery result is not the first specific combination, the process for AT lottery ends without executing the process for AT mode shift lottery after step S3604.

If it is the first specific combination, the process advances to step S3604 to acquire the AT mode lottery table for the normal section. In the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery has a common value regardless of the result of the first specific combination. is set. More specifically, regardless of the result of normal replay, pushing order bell, strong cherry, etc., if it is the first specific role, AT mode transition lottery when AT counter C is "0" to "56" is set to be elected to Note that the AT counter C in this embodiment can be updated by 1 between "0" and "9999", and is updated at predetermined intervals. 0) is set as a loop counter. That is, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, the AT counter C is assigned to the first specific combination so that the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of about 1/176. As shown in FIG. 87, in the lottery table for each game state, the point value PV for the first specific combination is set to be 28800 in total, and regardless of the game state, one of the first specific combinations is won. The probability of becoming is about 1 in 2.27. Therefore, in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the first specific combination during the normal section is about 1/399.

If it is determined in step S3602 that the advantageous section flag has not been set, it is determined in step S3605 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, the process advances to step S3603, and an AT mode transition lottery is performed on the condition that the player is the first specific combination. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set, the process advances to step S3606 to determine whether the lottery result of the current game is the second specific combination set as the trigger role for the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone. judge. As the second specific hand, in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as shown in FIG. All of these results are results in which the winning probability is set to be the same regardless of various game states except for the bonus state, such as the normal game state, the 1st RT state, the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state. The second specific combination is the result of excluding the normal replay, the no-question bell, and the push-order bell, which have a relatively high winning probability, from the first specific combination, and is called a rare combination. If the lottery result of this time is not the second specific combination, the process for AT lottery ends without executing the process for AT mode shift lottery after step S3607.

If it is the second specific combination, the process advances to step S3607 to determine whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. Then, if the CZ mode flag is not set, the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section is acquired in step S3608, and if the CZ mode flag is set, the CZ for CZ is obtained in step S3609. Acquire the AT mode transition lottery table. In the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery has a common value regardless of the result of the second specific combination. is set. More specifically, regardless of whether the result is a strong cherry, a weak cherry, etc., if it is the second specific role, the AT mode transition lottery will be won when the AT counter C is "0" to "4098". is set to That is, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section, the AT counter C is assigned so that the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of about 1/2.44. As shown in FIG. 87, in the lottery table for each game state, the point value PV for the second specific combination is set to be 800 in total, and regardless of the game state, one of the second specific combinations is won. The probability of becoming is about 1 in 81.9. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the second special role is about 1/199. , which is a higher probability than in the case of the normal interval.

Also, in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is set as a common value regardless of the result of the second specific combination. is "0" to "8264", the AT mode transition lottery is won. That is, in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT counter C is assigned to the second specific combination so that the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of about 1/1.21. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the second special role is about 1/99. Yes, the probability is higher than in the case of the above-mentioned normal section, and higher than in the case of using the table for the advantageous section.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in any one of steps S3604, S3608 and S3609, a process of obtaining the AT counter C is performed in step S3610. Here, as shown in FIG. 89, the lottery information storage area 106f in this embodiment is configured to be able to store AT counters C for 10 games as random numbers for the AT mode lottery. More specifically, the lottery information storage area 106f has an execution area AE and a storage area RE, and the storage area RE is provided with a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10. In step S3610, the AT counter C is acquired from the execution area AE as an area for storing the AT counter C used in the current game.

After that, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S3611. That is, when using the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, if the AT counter C is "0" to "56", the AT mode transition is won, and if the AT counter C is any other value, the AT mode transition is not won. Also, when using the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section, if the AT counter C is "0" to "4098", the AT mode transition is won, and if it is any other value, the AT mode is not won. When the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is used, if the AT counter C is "0" to "8264", the AT mode transition is won, and if the AT counter C is any other value, the AT mode is not won.

In subsequent step S3612, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S3611 is AT mode transition winning. In the case of winning the transition, the process for the case of winning the AT mode transition in the normal section is performed in steps S3613 to S3615. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S912 to S914. After that, after performing the process of setting the AT mode winning flag and the process for the portent mode in steps S3616 to S3619, the AT lottery process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the configuration for the AT mode transition lottery during the RB state is omitted, but the presence or absence of the AT mode transition lottery depends on whether the AT mode transition lottery is in the RB state as in the first embodiment. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which processing regarding the notification mode at the time of winning is performed.

If it is determined in step S3612 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S3620. Since the processing of steps S3620 to S3627 is the same as the processing of steps S922 to S929, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Random number acquisition processing>
In the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90, after the AT counter C is acquired in step S3701, each storage area RE of the lottery information storage area 106f is stored in step S3702. The AT counter C is stored in the area with the lowest number (basically, the tenth storage area RE10). Then, in step S3703, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, in step S3704, processing for setting the AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. After that, the random number acquisition process is terminated. If it is not in the advantageous section, the process for random number acquisition ends as it is without setting the output of the AT command.

That is, in the first embodiment, the AT command is set to be output under the condition that it is in the RB state, but in this embodiment, the AT command is set to be output under the condition that it is in the advantageous section. is different. On the other hand, the point that the AT counter C is acquired regardless of whether the AT command is output is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Processing for random number shift>
In the random number shift processing of this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process of clearing the AT counter C stored in RE1 is performed. In the subsequent step S3802, processing is performed to shift the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 to the lower area side. In this case, the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area. In the subsequent step S3803, it is determined whether or not the game to end this time is in the advantageous section. If it is in the advantageous section, in step S3804 a process for setting the shift time command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the random number shift process ends. If it is the normal section in step S3803, the random number shift processing ends.

That is, in the first embodiment, the shift command is set to be output under the condition that it is in the RB state, but in this embodiment, the shift command is set to be output under the condition that it is in the advantageous section. It is different in that On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the AT counter C is shifted irrespective of whether or not the shift command is output.

<Second section display processing>
Next, a description will be given of changes in the conditions for ending the advantageous section in this embodiment.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 92, in the second section display process in this embodiment, the same processes as steps S1501 to S1511 are executed in steps S3901 to S3911. In this embodiment, if the condition for forced termination in the advantageous section is not satisfied (step S3906: NO) and the normal termination condition is not satisfied (step S3910: NO, step S3911: NO). Also, when the second replay win is established in step S3912, the process advances to step S3907 to perform processing for ending the advantageous section. When the second regame winning has not been established, the advantageous section is continued.

As already explained, the second replay is a replay in which a win can be established when a falling replay is won, and a shift to the first RT state occurs when the win is established. Then, when the notification flag for AT is set, the RT state can be maintained in a higher RT state by generating a push order notification that does not establish the second replay winning prize when the falling replay is won. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 87, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the falling replay out of the pushing order replays is different from that in the first embodiment. there is In this case, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the transition to the first RT state is made not only when the transition rolls stop in the normal game state, but also when the second regame win is established in the normal game state. Further, when the second regame winning is established in the first RT state, it is preferable to set the state to the first RT state again. Then, in the present embodiment, when the second replay winning is established, the transition to the first RT state occurs, and if it is in the advantageous section, the transition to the normal section occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation corresponding to the second replay winning in the fall replay winning game, the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, while the second replay wins. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that does not correspond to winning, the advantageous section will not transition to the normal section.

<Processing for pending display>
Next, the pending display processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not an AT command has been received. If the AT command is received, that is, if it is in the advantageous section, a process of grasping the value of the AT counter C included in the received AT command is performed in step S4002, and the grasped value is executed in step S4003. A process for storing the AT counter C in the corresponding storage area is performed. Then, in step S4004, it is determined whether or not the AT counter C acquired this time is within a specific range as the winning range in the normal section. In other words, it is determined whether or not the value (0 to 56) is the value (0 to 56) that will win the AT mode transition lottery if the AT mode transition lottery can be received in the normal section even though the current state is the advantageous section. do. If it is within the specific range, in step S4005, the specific range counter TC provided in the various counter areas 183b is set to the number corresponding to the storage area storing the current AT counter C (basically, corresponding to the 10th storage area). After executing the process of inputting 10), this pending display process is terminated. The specific range counter TC is used by the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side to grasp the area in which the AT counters C included in the specific range are stored among the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. is a counter.

If no AT command has been received in step S4001, or if the AT counter C acquired this time is not within the specific range in step S4004, this pending display processing is terminated.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when an AT counter C is obtained such that if the AT mode transition lottery can be received in the first specific role in the normal section, the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT counter C is stored. The display control device 81 grasps the position of the storage area where it is located as a specific range counter TC.

<Processing for hold shift>
In the pending shift process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 94, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received. If a shift command has been received, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the specific range counter TC is greater than zero. If it is greater than 0, processing for subtracting 1 from the specific range counter TC is performed in step S4103.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, or if the process of step S4103 has been executed, the process advances to step S4104. In step S4104, a process of clearing the information of the AT counter C stored in the execution area corresponding to the display area for execution Dp and the image data for the special image as the pending display is performed. Then, in step S4105, the information of the AT counter C stored in the first storage area corresponding to the first unit reserved display area Dr1 and the image data for the special image as the reserved display are shifted to the execution area. In the subsequent step S4106, a process of shifting the pending display data displayed in each unit pending display area to a lower storage area is performed. In this case, the data in the tenth storage area is cleared, and the tenth storage area becomes an empty area in which no data is stored.

In step S4107, it is determined whether or not the specific range counter TC is greater than 3, and if it becomes 3 or less, in step S4108, on condition that the specific range counter TC is not 0, in step S4109 It is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. Then, when the specific range counter TC becomes equal to or less than the specific number (3) by the shift processing this time and it is not in the AT mode, the processing for setting the specific notification flag is executed in step S4110, and then this suspension is performed. End the shift processing. If the specific range counter TC is 0 in step S4108, the processing for clearing the specific notification flag is performed in step S4111, and then this pending shift processing ends. If the specific notification flag is not set in step S4111, that state is maintained.

If the shift time command is not received in step S4101, if the specific range counter is greater than the specific number in step S4107, or if the AT mode is not set in step S4109, a specific notification flag is set. This processing for hold shift ends without any change.

<Processing for notification of pressing order>
The pressing order notification process in the present embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment, particularly in the process of winning a fall replay.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the first promotion replay. determines whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S4203, the processing for performing the pressing order notification effect for the third re-game is executed, and then the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command has not been received, the pressing order notification processing is terminated. That is, in the processing of steps S4201 to S4203, although there is a difference in whether or not it is first determined whether or not the push order notification command has been received, the content of the processing is the same as that of steps S1901 to S1903. Similar to processing.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the replay is not the first promotion replay, it is determined in step S4204 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the fall replay. If it is a fall replay, it is determined in step S4205 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. If it has been received, in step S4206, the processing for performing the pressing order notification effect for the first re-game is executed, and then the main pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If the pressing order notification command has not been received in step S4205, it means that the AT mode is not in progress or that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won. Determine whether the flag is set. If the specific notification flag is not set, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. When the specific notification flag is set, as described above, the AT counter C that is pre-obtained has a value within the specific range that will win the AT mode transition if it is the first specific combination in the normal section. This is the case where the AT counter C is included and the AT counter C is used for the AT mode transition lottery within three games. In this case, in step S4208, a process for performing a specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 that the second regame winning is established and the advantageous section can be terminated is executed.

As the specific notification, as shown in FIG. 96(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the operation order corresponding to the second regame winning, and performs the operation in the operation order to end the advantageous section. On top of that, if it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery in the first specific role, it is possible to win the AT mode transition. ” is displayed. As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the slot machine 10, when the falling replays 1 to 3 are won, the stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to stop first establish the first replay winning prize or the first replay winning. For example, in fall replay 1, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the first replay win is established, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch is established. 44 is operated first, the second replay winning is established. Therefore, as the specific notification, when notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay winning at the time of winning the falling replay is performed, it is sufficient to notify the stop switches 42 to 44 that should be stopped first. In addition, among the stop switches 42 to 44 to be stopped first, two of the three correspond to the second regame winning. The configuration is such that the stop switches 42 to 44 are notified. That is, for example, as a specific notification when the falling replay 1 is won, the middle stop switch 43 out of the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 is notified as the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the second regame winning.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the specific notification is performed, the operation sequence that does not establish the second replay winning prize when the falling replay is won is also notified. That is, in FIG. 96(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the operation order corresponding to the first regame winning prize, and when the operation is performed in the operation order, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the second specific combination. For example, "rare combination mode" is displayed while indicating the operation sequence corresponding to the first regame winning so that it can be understood that it will be advantageous if the player wins. More specifically, when fall replay 1 is won, the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the first replay win is notified.

After executing the specific notification in step S4208, the pressing order notification for the second re-game is performed in step S4209, and the processing for performing the pressing order notification for the first re-game is performed in step S4206. After that, the actual pressing order notification processing is terminated. It should be noted that the processing of steps S4209 and S4206 is included in the processing for performing the pressing order notification that enables the second re-game winning and the pressing order notification that enables the first re-game winning among the specific notifications. be

If it is determined in step S4204 that the fall replay win is not made, in steps S4210 to S4224, the same processing as in steps S1906 to S1916 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is not determined whether or not the push order notification command has been received at the beginning of the push order notification process, after the process of determining that various push order wins have been made, the push order Determination processing (step S4211, step S4214, step S4218, step S4223) of whether or not a forward notification command is received is added. This is to perform the corresponding pressing order notification effect when the pressing order notification command is received, while not performing the pressing order notification effect when the pressing order notification command is not received. The basic contents of the processing are the same as those of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when a fall replay win is made, a specific notification is made on the auxiliary display unit 65, thereby notifying an operation mode that enables transition from an advantageous section to a normal section, and an advantageous section. Since the configuration is such that the maintenance operation mode is also notified, the player can select whether to end or maintain the advantageous section when the drop replay is won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 96(c), if the first replay win is established, the advantageous section will continue without ending. Win the AT mode shift lottery with probability. On the other hand, when the second replay winning prize is established, the advantageous section ends, and after that, when the first specific role is won, the AT mode shift lottery is won with a relatively high probability.

As already explained, the first specific role is a general term for normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no question bell, push order bell. If the player wins the specific combination, the player wins the AT mode shift lottery if the AT counter C is within the specific range of "0" to "56" in the normal section.

Then, as described above, if there is an AT counter C included in a specific range as an AT counter C acquired in advance, the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the AT counter C within the specific range In a game in which an AT mode transition lottery is performed, if the first specific role is successfully won, the AT mode transition lottery can be won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 88(a), since the probability of winning the first specific role is about 1/2.27, the AT counter C within the specific range is in the AT mode in the normal section. The winning rate in the case where the shift lottery is performed is about 1/2.27, and the AT mode shift lottery is won with a relatively high probability.

However, if the AT counter C within the specific range does not win the first special combination, the AT mode shift lottery will not be won, and if the first special combination is not the normal section but the advantageous section, the AT counter C Even if is within a specific range, there are cases where winning the AT mode shift lottery is not possible.

For example, in the advantageous section, when winning the second specific role, which is a general term for strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell included in the first special role, If the AT counter C is "0" to "4098" ("0" to "8264" in the CZ mode), it is possible to win the AT mode transition lottery, but even if the AT counter C is within this range, In the case of normal replay, non-question bell, or pressing order bell winning, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (the transition lottery is not performed).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if an AT counter C within a specific range is pre-acquired before winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, in the game corresponding to the AT counter C within the specific range The notification mode of the specific notification is set so that the player can select between the game property aiming to win the first specific role and the game property aiming to win the second specific role in the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game in which the player selects the contents of the AT mode transition lottery according to his/her own will.

Incidentally, the case where the specific notification is performed is the case where the fall replay win is made and the push order notification command has not been received. Therefore, in this situation, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the main controller 101 side does not notify the pressing order. In other words, there is a case where the second re-game winning is established and the advantageous section ends due to the fact that the pressing order notification and the specific notification are not performed.

As described above, even if the AT counter C obtained in advance includes a value within the specific range, the specific notification is made after the fall replay win is won. That is, even if the AT counter C is within the specific range, the specific notification is not given unless the drop replay is won. By doing so, it is possible to reduce annoyance by performing the specific notification even in a situation where the advantageous section cannot be changed to the normal section.

In addition, the AT counter C obtained in advance includes those within a specific range, and even if the second replay wins the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery will not be won in each game. The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 100% in this slot machine 10 as well as being performed with all the results obtained (FIG. 35). In other words, even if the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, the advantageous section is returned relatively early. Then, if the AT counter C obtained in advance as described above includes those within the specific range, and if the second regame win causes the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, the AT counter within the specific range In the game before C becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, the result is a loss, and in the game where the AT counter C within the specific range is the target of the AT mode transition lottery, the first specific role is won. AT mode shift will be won.

In this case, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within the specific range in the normal section, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in units of one game is about 1/2.27 as described above, which is very unusual. Although there is a high probability in The probability of winning a role is about 1/7.38 to about 1/7.42, which is lower than the probability per game. In addition, the probability of winning the first special role after failing twice in a row is about 1/24.0 to about 1/24.3, and failing three times in a row. The probability of winning the first special role is about 1/78.0 to about 1/79.5, and the probability of winning the first special role after losing four times in a row is about 253. 1/260 to about 1/260. In other words, even if the AT counter C is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f within a specific range, the AT mode is always performed with a probability of about 1/2.27 even when the normal section is shifted to. You will not be eligible for the transfer lottery. And the probability of winning the 1st specific role after losing 3 times in a row in the normal section is the probability of winning the 2nd specific role in the advantageous section and winning the AT mode transition lottery (about 199 minutes Although it is higher than 1), the probability of winning the 1st special role after losing 4 times in a row in the normal section is the 2nd special role in the advantageous section and winning the AT mode transition lottery. lower than the probability of

For example, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the AT counter C stored in the ninth storage area RE9 is a value within a specific range, if the fall replay is won in the current game, the second replay is won. If a prize is established, the probability of losing consecutively in the next game (first memory area RE1) to 8 games later is about 1/12400 in the 1st RT state, and then 9 games. The probability of later becoming the first special hand is about 1 in 28300.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the AT counter C within the specific range is not immediately notified simply because the AT counter C within the specific range is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. A specific notification is made when the stored memory area is within a specific number of games (within three games). That is, in the case of FIG. 97(a), the specific notification is not performed, and the first re-game winning can be established.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97(b), when the AT counter C within the specific range is within the specific number of games and the AT mode transition lottery is dealt with, and the drop replay is won, the specific notification is made. , the second replay win is established, and the advantageous section can be shifted to the normal section.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

During an advantageous section, if an AT mode transition lottery is received in a normal section, and an AT counter C within a specific range is acquired with a high probability of winning the AT mode transition, it is possible to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section. specific notification to be made. As a result, based on the premise that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the advantageous section than in the normal section, once the transition to the normal section occurs, it becomes easier to win the AT mode transition lottery. Such a novel playability is realized.

In this case, even if the AT counter C within the specific range is acquired, it is not immediately possible to shift to the normal section, but by winning the fall replay and establishing the second replay prize. Since the transition is made possible, the difficulty level of the game is improved, and the amusement of the game can be increased.

However, as described above, by using the second replay winning at the time of winning the fall replay as a trigger for the normal section, even though the AT counter C within the specific range is not acquired, the transition to the normal section may occur. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the second re-game winning by means of a pressing order notification effect or the like during the AT mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the AT mode from not only falling from the RT state due to the second regame winning, but also ending the AT mode due to the end of the advantageous section. On the other hand, unless the AT mode is on, if the AT counter C within the specific range is not obtained, and if the operation order at the time of winning the fall replay matches the second replay winning prize, the advantageous section ends. If there is no match, the advantageous section continues. This is based on the premise that the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section is performed with all small hands and that the winning probability is high (100%). This is based on the idea that the player would suffer little (no) disadvantage because the game would immediately shift to the advantageous section again even if the game ended without any change.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the falling replay is won in a situation where the AT counter C within the specific range is obtained, the specific notification is not generated if the specific range counter TC is greater than 3. Although it is possible to reduce the demerit of once falling to the normal section by increasing the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section as described above, This is because if the transition to the advantageous section occurs before the AT counter C within the range becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, the action may be meaningless. And the specific range counter TC = 3 as the boundary is the probability of winning the AT mode transition when maintaining the advantageous section, and the first specific role without returning to the advantageous section when shifting to the normal section. If it is better to maintain the advantageous section, it is possible to win the fall replay in the situation where the AT counter C within a specific range is acquired. Even if it becomes, specific notification is made not to be performed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition when the player is shifted to the normal section according to the specific notification.

In the normal section, by setting multiple lottery results as the first specific role that wins the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed with the AT counter C within the specific range, When the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C, the chances of winning the AT mode transition can be increased.

In particular, for the first specific combination, the lottery result of the game makes it easy to win, and the specific range is narrowed (the number of corresponding AT counters C is reduced), so AT counters C within the specific range are acquired. While increasing the probability that the AT counter C will be awarded to the AT mode transition lottery when the first special role is won, the winning probability itself of the AT mode transition lottery can be lowered.

In addition, as the first specific combination, since the result is set so that the winning probability does not change depending on each game state, regardless of the state when shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, the AT counter C within the specific range The winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery used can be made common. As a result, there is no need to complicate the configuration such as performing specific notification in consideration of the state at the time of transition, and the intelligibility of the game is improved.

Moreover, if it is the first specific role, it is possible to win a high probability result such as a normal replay or a push order bell, or a low probability result such as a strong cherry or a weak cherry. Since it is configured to be able to win the AT mode shift lottery using the AT counter C in the inside, the intelligibility of the game is improved, and the game property of winning the AT mode shift with high probability can be suitably realized.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, consideration is given to the presence of an AT counter C that wins the AT mode shift when the second special combination is won during the advantageous section. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing pending display processing in this modification.

If an AT command has been received in step S4301, the value of AT counter C is grasped in step S4302, and information corresponding to the value of AT counter C is stored in the corresponding storage area (tenth storage area) in step S4303. ) is stored. Then, in step S4304, it is determined whether or not the information of the AT counter C acquired this time is within the range of the value that will be won if it is an AT mode shift lottery triggered by the second specific role during the advantageous section. . That is, as described above, in the advantageous section, when the AT counter C is "0" to "4098" ("0" to "8264" in the case of CZ mode), the AT mode in the second specific role If the shift lottery is performed, the AT mode shift is won, and in step S4304, the above-mentioned "0" to "4098" is set as the second specific range, and whether the AT counter C acquired this time is within the second specific range or not. make a judgment as to whether If it is within the second specific range, in step S4305, the number (10) corresponding to the storage area in which the AT counter C is stored this time is added to the second specific range counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 183b. Perform input processing. The second specific range counter TC2 corresponds to the above-mentioned specific range counter TC, and the CPU 181 grasps the position of the storage area where the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition win in the case of the second specific combination is stored. It is a counter for In this modified example, the specific range counter TC for the first specific combination is referred to as a first specific range counter TC1 in relation to the second specific range counter TC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S4304 or after the processing of step S4305 is executed, in step S4306 it is determined whether the AT counter C acquired this time is within the first specific range (“0” to “56”). If it is within the first specific range, the process of inputting 10 to the first specific range counter TC1 is executed in step S4307, and then this pending display process is terminated. The processing in steps S4306 and S4307 is the same as the processing in steps S4004 and S4005 described above. If the AT command has not been received in step S4301, or if it is determined that it is not within the first specific range in step S4302, the pending display processing ends.

In the pending shift process in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 99, if a shift command is received in step S4401, then in step S4402 it is determined whether or not the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 0. judge. If it is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the first specific range counter TC1 is performed in step S4403. The processing in steps S4402 and S4403 is the same as the processing in steps S4102 and S4103 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, or if the process of step S4403 has been executed, the flow advances to step S4404 to determine whether or not the second specific range counter TC2 is greater than zero. If it is larger than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the second specific range counter TC2 is performed in step S4405. The processing of steps S4404 and S4405 corresponds to the processing of steps S4402 and S4403.

If a negative determination is made in step S4404 or after the processing of step S4405 is executed, processing for shifting the pending information (information of the AT counter C) is performed in steps S4406 to S4408. These processes are the same as those of steps S4104 to S4106.

In subsequent step S4409, it is determined whether or not the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 3. If it is 3 or less, it is determined in step S4411 whether or not the AT mode is in progress, provided that the first specific range counter TC1 is not 0 in step S4410. If it is not in the AT mode, a process of setting the first specific notification flag is executed in step S4412. The first specific notification flag corresponds to the above specific notification flag. If the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 3 in step S4409, if the first specific range counter TC1 is 0 in step S4410, or if the AT mode is in progress in step S4411, step S4413 A process of clearing the first specific notification flag is executed. If the first specific notification flag is not set in step S4413, that state is maintained.

After executing the process of step S4412 or step S4413, the process proceeds to step S4414. In step S4414, it is determined whether or not the second specific range counter TC2 is smaller than the first specific range counter TC1 and greater than zero. That is, in step S4414, among the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the AT counter C to be the target of the AT mode transition lottery is selected before the AT counters C included in the first specific range. It is determined whether or not there is anything included in the second specific range (Fig. 101(b)). If the determination in step S4414 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4415 whether or not it is in the AT mode, and if it is not in the AT mode, the second specific notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4416. After executing the setting process, the pending shift process ends. If the second specific range counter TC2 is 0 in step S4414, or if the second specific range counter TC2 is larger than 0 but still larger than the first specific range counter TC1, or in step S4415 during AT mode If there is, the processing for clearing the second specific notification flag is executed in step S4417, and then this pending shift processing ends. If the second specific notification flag is not set in step S4417, that state is maintained.

In the pressing order notification processing in this modified example, if it is determined in step S4504 that the falling replay has been won, it is determined in step S4505 whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, the pressing order notification effect for the first replay is performed in step S4506, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. These processes are the same as those of the second embodiment.

If it is determined in step S4505 that the pressing order notification command has not been received, it is determined in step S4507 whether or not the first specific notification flag has been set. If the first specific notification flag is not set, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the first specific notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S4508 whether or not the second specific notification flag has been set. When the second specific notification flag is not set, after performing the process of executing the first specific notification in step S4509, in step S4510 the second re-game pressing order notification is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4506. After performing the pressing order notification for the first replay, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. Note that the first specific notification corresponds to the specific notification in the second embodiment. In this case, a notification is made that the second re-game winning is established and the advantageous section can be ended, and a notification is made that the first re-game winning is established and the advantageous section can be maintained. Further, if the advantageous section is ended by establishing the second replay winning prize, and the AT mode shift lottery is received in the first specific role, the AT mode shift winning is likely to be won.

If the second specific notification flag is set in step S4508, it is suggested that if the AT mode transition lottery can be received in the second specific combination during the advantageous section in step S4511, the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won. A process for performing the second specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is executed. As the second specific notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(a), at a position corresponding to the operation order for establishing the first regame winning, if it is the first specific notification, "rare combination mode" is displayed. Where it is displayed, along with a predetermined character, it is displayed that ``Rare role winning is more chance than usual! It is good to suggest that it is easy to be elected.

After executing the process for the second specific notification in step S4511, the process for the first specific notification is performed in step S4509. In this case, the content of the first specific notification is adjusted so that the second specific notification is prioritized for the part that overlaps with the second specific notification as described above. Then, in steps S4510 and S4506, the processing for performing the pressing order notification effect for the first replay and the second replay is executed, and then the actual pressing order notification processing is terminated. The processes of steps S4501 to S4503 and steps S4512 to S4525 are the same as the processes of steps S4201 to S4203 and steps S4210 to S4223.

As described above, in this modification, when the specific notification is performed, the second specific notification may be performed in consideration of the case where it is better to maintain the advantageous section, so the player's range of selection can be spread and the interest of the game can be increased.

In particular, as described above, the scene in which the second specific notification is performed is limited to the game in which the specific notification is performed, and the second specific notification is performed when the AT counter C is within the second specific range. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the fact that the second specific notification is rather troublesome. That is, if it is an advantageous section, it is basically possible to receive an AT mode transition lottery that is more advantageous than a normal section. In a situation where is pressed, the effectiveness of the second specific notification is further improved by configuring the second specific notification only when there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition due to the prior knowledge of the current AT counter C. can be increased.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are changed. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

In this modification, the process after it is determined that the second re-game winning has been established in step S4612 is different. judge.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in this modification, the stop symbols associated with the second replay win are the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M. Alternatively, the "second replay" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line. A "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol and a "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line. A symbol, a "first replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are set to stop on the activated line. Of these, when the second replay winning is established with the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol, although the transition to the first RT state occurs, the advantageous section does not end, and the third stop symbol is displayed. When the second replay win is established through the above, the transition to the first RT state and the end of the advantageous section are set to occur.

It should be noted that even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order associated with the second replay winning at the time of winning the fall replay, the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol may be operated. When none of the stop symbols can be stopped, the first replay winning prize is established.

That is, in step S4613, when the second replay winning is achieved with the third stop symbol among the first stop symbols to the third stop symbols, the second replay winning is achieved with the ending symbols. Affirmative determination is made assuming that it has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4613, the process advances to step S4607 to perform processing for ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4613, the second section display process is terminated. In this case, the advantageous section is continued (maintained) even if the second regame win is established. Therefore, when the fall replay is won and the second replay win is established, if the third stop symbol can be stopped, the advantageous section ends and the third stop symbol can be stopped. If not (if the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol can be stopped), the advantageous section is continued (maintained).

The effect processing when a drop replay is won in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 103(a). FIG. 103(a) is a flow chart showing the first stop OFF effect setting process among the processes for the effect when a falling replay is won. This first stop OFF effect setting process is performed in the case of performing the stop OFF effect based on the first stop OFF operation at the time of winning the fall replay among the effect setting processes (FIG. 51) at each stop operation in the display control device 81. This is the processing to be performed (step S2108).

In step S4701, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the first stop reel that is stopped this time corresponds to the second replay win. Here, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, as described above, the "black BAR" symbol that constitutes the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the "young man" that constitutes the third stop symbol. ' symbol and 'watermelon' symbol are symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning prize. On the other hand, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are symbols corresponding to the first replay win. That is, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the symbols corresponding to the first replay win and the symbols corresponding to the second replay win among the falling replays. can. Further, when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol constituting the first stop symbol and the third stop symbol and the "black BAR" symbol constituting the second stop symbol are the first and second stop symbols. 2 It is a symbol corresponding to a replay win. On the other hand, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol are the symbols corresponding to the first replay win. That is, even when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the symbols corresponding to the first replay win and the symbols corresponding to the second replay win among the falling replays. can.

On the other hand, when the first stop reel is the middle reel 32M, the "first replay" symbol and the "second replay" symbol constituting the first to third stop symbols correspond to the second replay winning. These "first replay" symbols and "second replay" symbols are also symbols corresponding to the first replay win. That is, when the first stop reel is the middle reel 32M, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning and the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning in the falling replay. Can not.

Therefore, in step S4701, when it is determined whether or not the stop symbol on the first stop reel that is stopped this time corresponds to the second replay winning, the first stop reel is the left reel 32L or the right reel. In the case of 32R, if it corresponds to the second re-game winning, affirmative determination is made, while if it corresponds to the first re-game winning, a negative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the present first stop OFF time effect setting processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the first stopped reel that is stopped this time is the middle reel 32M, the affirmative determination is made without distinguishing between the first re-game winning and the second re-game winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4702 whether specific notification (first specific notification) is being executed. That is, it is possible to end the advantageous section by establishing the second replay winning prize when the fall replay is won, and to receive the AT mode transition lottery at the AT counter C in the specific range (first specific range). It is determined whether or not notification is being made. If a negative determination is made in step S4702, it is determined in step S4703 whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification effect is being performed. The pressing order notification effect in this case is the pressing order notification effect for the first replay.

In step S4701, the symbol corresponding to the second replay win is stopped on the first reel, and in step S4702, the specific notification is not performed, and in step S4703, the pressing order notification effect is performed. There is a high possibility that the player made a mistake in the order of operations during the AT mode, etc., and operated the buttons corresponding to the second replay winning prize. Therefore, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4703, in step S4704, after executing the processing for performing the end symbol avoidance notification on the auxiliary display unit 65, the present first stop OFF time effect setting is performed. End the process.

Here, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped, the second replay winning by the first stop symbol is established, and the second stop symbol or the third stop symbol is established. The second replay winning by the stop symbol is not established. Further, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, even if the "youth" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol is stopped, if the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, the third stop symbol is used. The second re-game winning is not established, and by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, it is possible to establish the second re-game winning by the second stop symbol.

Further, even when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped, the second replay winning by the second stop symbol is established, and the first stop symbol or the third stop symbol is established. The second replay winning by the stop symbol is not established. Further, when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, even if the "watermelon" symbol is stopped, if the "youth" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the left reel 32L, the third stop symbol is used. The second re-game winning is not established, and by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, it is possible to establish the second re-game winning by the first stop symbol.

When the first stop reel is the middle reel 32M, if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R, the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol is displayed instead of the third stop symbol. It is possible to establish a second replay winning prize by the stop symbol of .

That is, at the stage of stopping the first reel, it is not determined which of the first to third stop symbols will establish the second replay winning.

Therefore, in the end symbol avoidance notification in the above step S4704, for example, as shown in FIG. is not established, that is, the symbol to be stopped (targeted) is notified so as to establish the winning with the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol. FIG. 104(a) shows an end symbol avoidance notification when the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first reel. Aim at the clusters of "white BAR" symbols and "black BAR" symbols, and aim at the clusters of "black BAR" symbols, "red 7" symbol and "black BAR" symbol of numbers 7 to 9 on the right reel 32R, and perform a stop operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol corresponding to the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol on the active line, and if it does not stop, the current AT mode ends. It shows how a notification suggesting that

Then, according to the notification for avoiding the end symbol, when the "black BAR" symbol is successfully stopped on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R, the first symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 104(b1) or FIG. The second replay winning is established at the stop symbol of or the second stop symbol. In this case, the advantageous section does not end. However, the RT state shifts to the first RT state based on the second regame win. Therefore, it will shift to the first RT state during the AT mode, and then return to the third RT state by notification of the pushing order at the time of winning the first promotion replay and the second promotion replay.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, the notification to stop the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R in FIG. 104(a) ends. This is performed as symbol avoidance notification, and when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, the notification to the effect that the left reel 32L in FIG. performed as

When the specific notification (the first specific notification) is being executed in step S4702, after executing the processing for performing the end symbol stop notification in the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4705, this first The stop OFF time effect setting process is terminated.

In the end symbol stop notification in step S4705, for example, as shown in FIG. 105(a), based on the first stop reel, the second replay winning is established with the third stop symbol on the remaining reels. In other words, a symbol to be stopped (targeted) is notified so as not to establish a prize with the first stop symbol or the second stop symbol. FIG. 105(a) shows the termination symbol stop notification when the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first reel. BAR symbol, and stops the symbol corresponding to the third stop symbol ("Youth" symbol or "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R) on the effective line. If it is possible to stop it, it is possible to end the current advantageous section and shift to the normal section, that is, the AT mode transition lottery with the AT counter C within the specific range is normally held. It shows how a notification is given to suggest that it is possible to receive it in the section.

Then, when the left and right reels 32L and 32R succeed in stopping the symbol corresponding to the third stop symbol according to the termination symbol stop notification, the third stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, the second replay win is established. In this case, the advantageous section ends, and the RT state transitions to the first RT state.

Although the detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, the right reel 32R in FIG. When the notification is performed as an end symbol stop notification and the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, there is a notification to the effect that the left reel 32L in FIG. It is performed as an end symbol stop notification.

In this way, in the configuration in which the advantageous section can be terminated by the second re-game winning, the case where the second re-game winning is established with the first stop symbol and the case where the second re-game winning is established with the second stop symbol. , the advantageous section is not terminated, and the advantageous section is terminated when the third stop symbol is established. Therefore, the player is prevented from erroneously ending the advantageous section, and when the AT counter C is within a specific range, the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, thereby receiving an advantageous AT mode transition lottery. It is possible to preferably avoid the fact that the configuration that allows the above to aggravate the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, by doing so, in order to receive the AT mode transition lottery that is advantageous by shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section when the AT counter C is within the specific range, the first stop symbols to Since it is necessary to establish the second replay winning prize with the third stop symbols among the third stop symbols, the difficulty of the game is increased and the interest of the game can be increased.

Here, among the first to third stop symbols, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol in which the advantageous section does not end correspond to the "black BAR" symbol on the left and right reels 32L and 32R. The "black BAR" symbol on the left and right reels 32L, 32R is not associated with the third stop symbol that is attached and ends the advantageous section. Therefore, if the "black BAR" pattern is successfully stopped on the effective line of either the left or right reel 32L, 32R, the advantageous section can be prevented from ending, and the effective line can be prevented from ending on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R. If it succeeds in preventing the "black BAR" pattern from stopping, it is possible to end the advantageous section. In this case, two "black BAR" symbols are arranged on each of the left and right reels 32L and 32R, and are arranged as a cluster with one symbol interposed therebetween. Therefore, the "black BAR" symbols are easily visible as a mass on the left and right reels 32L, 32R, and the operation difficulty is relatively low when aiming at the "black BAR" symbols.

On the other hand, among the first to third stop symbols, the third stop symbol at which the advantageous section ends is associated with the "young man" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L. A "watermelon" symbol is associated with the right reel 32R. In this case, a player who cannot directly see the "youth" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol should use the "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L or the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, which are relatively large symbols. It is assumed that you aim for the corresponding pattern. However, even with these relatively large symbols, the visibility is lower than the left and right clusters of "black BAR" symbols, and the "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. When operating aiming at a design, the operation difficulty becomes comparatively high.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously ending the advantageous interval, and to favorably enhance the interest of the game in which the advantageous interval is deliberately ended.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the specific notification is made when a predetermined notification lottery is won. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the process is different when the specific range counter TC becomes 3 or less and an AT mode transition lottery based on the AT counter C within the specific range is to be performed within three games. That is, if it is determined in step S4807 that the specific range counter TC is 3 or less, it is determined in step S4809 that the AT mode is not being set on condition that the specific range counter TC is not 0 in step S4808. conduct. If the AT mode is not in progress, in this modification, a specific notification lottery process is executed in step S4810.

In the specific notification lottery process, a specific notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous interval AG on the main controller 101 side) and the winning probability Information on the set value set by the setting process of (1) is grasped, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification using a lottery counter or the like. As shown in FIG. 107, the specific information lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the specific information lottery differs depending on the number of games in the advantageous section and the set value. Specifically, in general, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the specific notification lottery. It is easy to win the specific notification lottery when the game table is 900 games, and in settings 2 and 4, when the number of games in the advantageous section is 200 games, 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games. It is easy to win the specific notification lottery, and setting 6 is set so that it becomes easier to win the specific notification lottery as the number of games in the advantageous section increases. Also, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than 100 games, setting 4 to setting 6 can win the specific notification lottery, while setting 1 to setting 3 are set so as not to win. When the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds 1000 games, the probability of winning the specific information lottery increases, and in this modified example, it is set so that the player always wins.

After the specific notification lottery is performed in step S4810, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S4811. If the player wins, the processing for setting the specific notification flag is executed in step S4812, and then the pending shift processing is terminated. If the notification lottery is not won, the reserved shift processing is terminated without setting the specific notification flag.

The processes of steps S4801 to S4809 and steps S4812 to S4813 are the same as the processes of steps S4101 to S4111.

In this way, a chance zone is set as a chance zone in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery after the transition to the advantageous section by using the specific notification that can increase the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery by shifting to the normal section. It is possible to Since it is set so that it becomes easier to win the specific notification lottery as the number of games in the advantageous section increases, it is possible to use the chance zone to relieve the difficulty in shifting to the AT mode.

In this case, even if the specific notification lottery is won and the specific notification flag is set as described above, the specific notification is not performed unless the fall replay is won before the specific notification flag is cleared. Therefore, the advantageous section can be continued. In other words, when the specific notification is made, the advantageous interval is changed to the normal interval, and the number of games in the advantageous interval is reset. By doing so, if the transition to the normal section is caused according to the specific notification, the game is played with the hope of winning the first specific role so that the AT mode transition lottery will be won at any cost. , and the interest in the game in which the advantageous section is ended based on the AT counter C is remarkably enhanced.

In addition, since the probability of winning the specific notification lottery is set differently, it is possible to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section without setting the difference in the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery in the normal section. It becomes possible to indirectly adjust the winning rate of the AT mode shift lottery by the execution rate of the specific notification. Therefore, even if there is a situation in which it is not possible to provide a setting difference in the configuration relating to the instruction function such as the AT mode in the normal section, it is possible to adjust well within the range of the situation.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the specific notification is executed during the AT mode, and when the number of increased medals in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit increase (2400), the specific notification can be performed. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process in this modified example.

The processing of steps S4901 to S4906 is the same as the processing of steps S4101 to S4106. Based on the reception of the shift command, the data in each storage area is shifted, and the AT counter within the specific range is shifted. The position information of C (specific range counter TC) is updated.

In step S4107, a specific notification lottery process is executed. FIG. 109(a) is a flow chart showing the specific notification lottery process in this modified example.

In step S5001, a process of grasping a value corresponding to the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) managed by the main controller 101 side is performed. For example, every time MY update processing on the main control device 101 side is performed, a MY command indicating the current value of the MY counter is output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 also grasps the latest information of the MY counter. A possible configuration is preferable.

In the following step S5002, based on the information grasped in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the MY counter is 2350 or more, i.e., there are only a few left (below a specific number, 50 or less) to the upper limit increase number of 2400. A determination is made as to whether or not there is a certain situation. If the number is less than 2350, the specific notification lottery process is terminated. In this case, since the specific notification lottery is not executed, the specific notification is not performed either. If there are only a few remaining numbers up to the upper limit increase number, it is determined in step S5003 whether or not the lottery completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The lottery completed flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to specify that the specific notification lottery has already been executed in the current advantageous section. If the lottery completed flag is set, the specific notification lottery process is terminated.

If the lottery completion flag is not set, in step S5004, a process of grasping information corresponding to the presence or absence of an excess flag managed by the main controller 101 side is executed. As already explained, the excess flag is a flag set in the remaining game number management process (step S1504) or the remaining game number management process (step S1506) in the second section display process (FIG. 44). This is a flag indicating that the forced termination condition has already been established based on the number AG, the number MY of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games, and the number of remaining AT mode games. More specifically, if the total of the number of games in the current advantageous section AG and the number of remaining games in AT mode (including those added later) exceeds the maximum number of games (1500 games), the number of remaining games is managed. The first excess flag is set in the process, and the total of the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY, the remaining number of AT mode games (including the added amount), and the planned payout number calculated from the average net increase number of each game However, if the number exceeds the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets), a second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process. That is, in step S5004, it is determined whether or not the main controller 101 side has already set the first excess flag or the second excess flag. In addition, when the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a command including corresponding information is output to the display control device 81, and the above determination is performed by specifying the command. It should be configured to perform

Then, in step S5005, a process of acquiring a specific notification lottery table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S5006, a specific notification lottery is executed. In the specific notification lottery table, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the winning probability of the specific notification lottery differs between when any excess flag is set and when none of the excess flags is set. In addition, it is set so that the probability of winning differs depending on the setting value. More specifically, when any of the excess flags is set, regardless of whether the set value is high or low, it is set to win the specific notification lottery with a higher probability than when the excess flag is set. , and in this modification, it is set so that the probability of winning is 100%. When none of the excess flags is set, the setting is set so that the lower the setting, the more difficult it is to win the specific information lottery, and the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the specific information lottery. , setting 6 is set to win with a probability of 100%.

After the specific notification lottery is performed in step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery is won in step S5007. When winning, in step S5008, a process of setting a specific notification winning flag in the various flags storage area 183a is performed. When it is determined that it is not won in step S5007, or after setting the specific notification winning flag in step S5008, the process of setting the lottery completed flag is executed in step S5009, and this specific notification lottery process exit.

In the pending shift process, after executing the specific notification lottery process in step S4907, it is determined in step S4908 whether or not the specific range counter TC is 3 or less. If it is greater than 3, the pending shift processing is terminated as it is, and if it is 3 or less, it is determined whether or not the specific range counter TC is 0 in step S4909. If the specific range counter TC is 1 to 3 instead of 0, it is determined in step S4910 whether or not the AT mode is in progress. In this modified example, since the specific notification is performed during the AT mode, if the AT mode is not in effect, the pending shift process is terminated. If it is in the AT mode, it is determined in step S4911 whether or not the specific notification winning flag is set. If the specific notification winning flag is set, the processing for setting the specific notification flag is executed in step S4912, and then the pending shift processing is terminated. If the specific notification winning flag is not set, the pending shift process is terminated without setting the specific notification flag. Also, if the specific range counter TC is 0 in step S4909, the presence or absence of the specific notification flag is grasped in step S4913. If it is set, it is cleared. maintain that state. After that, the pending shift process is terminated.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the pressing order notification process in this modified example. In this modified example, the process when winning the fall replay is different from the process when winning the push-order bell.

That is, if it is determined in step S5104 that the falling replay is won, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the specific notification flag is set. If the specific notification flag is not set, it is determined at step S5106 whether or not the pressing order notification command has been received. After performing the effect, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command has not been received in step S5106, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

When the specific notification flag is set in step S5105, the processing for executing the specific notification is performed in step S5108, and the pressing order notification for the second replay is performed in step S5109, and the first replay is performed in step S5107. After performing the processing for performing the pressing order notification for the game, the actual pressing order notification processing is terminated. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the pressing order corresponding to the second re-game, notifies that the advantageous section can be terminated, and at the same time, performs the pressing corresponding to the first re-game. A notification of the order is also performed, and a notification that allows the advantageous section to continue is performed.

If it is determined in step S5122 that the pressing order bell has been won, it is determined in step S5123 whether or not a pressing order notification command has been received. is set. If it is not set, in step S5124, the pressing order notification effect processing corresponding to the first small combination (9-piece payout small combination) is performed, and then the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the specific notification winning flag is set in step S5123, the processing for the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination (3-piece payout small winning combination) in step S5124 is performed, the actual pressing order notification processing is terminated.

That is, by setting the specific notification winning flag, when the pressing order bell is won, the pressing order notification for the 2nd to 26th minor combinations with a small number of medals paid out is performed, and furthermore, the pressing order within the specific range is performed. When the AT counter C is obtained, a specific notification flag is set, and a specific notification is made when a fall replay win is made during the AT mode. In addition, in the process for notifying the pressing order, the processes other than the processes described above are the same as those in FIG. 100, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111(c), for example, even if the AT counter C within the specific range is obtained at timing t1 when the MY counter in the AT mode is not near the upper limit (less than 2350), the specific Since no notification lottery is performed, the specific notification winning flag is not set. Then, since the specific notification flag is not set, even if the specific range counter TC reaches 1 to 3 and the falling replay is won, the specific notification is not performed. In this case, the pressing order notification effect for the first regame winning prize is generated, and the advantageous section and AT mode can be continued. In addition, when the MY counter is not near the upper limit, the specific notification winning flag is not set, so as shown in FIG. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 according to the pressing order notification effect, 9 medals can be paid out (increase of 6 medals), and the number of medals held can be increased. .

When the MY counter reaches near the upper limit at timing t2, a specific notification lottery is performed. When the specific notification lottery is won, a specific notification winning flag is set. As a result, for example, when the pressing order bell is won at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. will be done. As a result, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in accordance with the pressing order notification effect, three medals are paid out (increase of 0 medals), and the medal increase speed is reduced. will not increase. In other words, when the MY counter reaches the upper limit, a push order notification is generated to prevent the upper limit from being reached when the push order bell wins.

Then, the AT counter C within the specific range is obtained slightly before the timing of t4, and at the timing of t4 when the AT counter C is stored in the area below the third storage area RE3, the fall replay is won. Then, specific notification occurs. By performing an operation in accordance with the notification that establishes the second regame winning among the specific notifications, the advantageous section ends and the AT mode also ends. In this case, in the processing for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval game number AG and the MY counter are initialized. After that, when the AT counter C within the specific range is used for the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of t5 during the normal section, if the first special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the player enters the advantageous section. will be transferred again.

As described above, since the specific notification is performed near the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is possible to provide a chance to reset the advantageous section, and to realize continuous driving in the AT mode. Moreover, forcibly ending the game when the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached means that the player is forcibly ending the game while the player is probably thinking that the AT mode will continue. Although there is a concern about a decline, by enabling the AT mode to be reset near the upper limit as described above, it is possible to suppress the decline in the motivation to play.

In particular, when the number of remaining games exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, or the upper limit of the number of increases, it is easier to win the specific notification lottery, so the above-mentioned decrease in motivation to play is further reduced. It is possible to suppress it suitably.

In this case, even if it is near the upper limit of the advantageous interval, the AT counter C within the specific range is acquired, and the fall replay is won in the situation where the AT counter C is acquired. Furthermore, even if the AT counter C is shifted to the normal section, the AT counter C does not shift to the advantageous section before the game used for the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT counter C is used for the AT mode transition lottery. There are many conditions for the occurrence of the AT mode revolver, such as the need to win the first special role in the game played. In other words, since it is designed so that the continuous game is performed only when these conditions are successfully established, it is possible to adjust the AT mode so that it does not become too continuous, and the game that passes through each condition. can be provided, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) Based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the RB state, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by the AT counter C acquired in advance. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the AT mode transition lottery is performed by the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the establishment of the predetermined termination condition. For example, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the satisfaction of the BB state termination condition, or the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the satisfaction of the CB state or RT state termination condition. , the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the satisfaction of the termination condition of the internal state in which the BB winning or the RB winning is carried over (based on the establishment of the BB winning prize or the RB winning prize). Further, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed in a game in which a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and the timing of performing the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the end of the game in which the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. For example, regardless of the operation mode of the current game, when the upper limit of payouts is reached in the current game and a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, or when a predetermined ending combination (punk combination) is won, the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, in a game in which the predetermined ending combination is won, it can be determined that the predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the game without waiting for the end of the game. Therefore, in such a configuration, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed at any timing of the game in which the predetermined end condition is satisfied.

(2) Although the termination condition of the RB state is stipulated that 110 medals are paid out, the number of medals may be smaller or larger. Also, the end condition is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be satisfied when the number of increased medals in the RB state reaches a specific number (110), or to be satisfied when the number of decreased medals reaches a specific number. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Further, it may be configured such that the end condition is established when a prize such as a small combination is won a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, even if each of the end conditions described above is not satisfied, if the RB state is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of games, the RB state may be ended. In these cases, the game in which the end condition is satisfied may be changed based on the game result (lottery result, operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44, winning result, etc.) of each game in the RB state.

(3) The conditions for ending the RB state may differ between the first RB state and the second RB state. In addition, the end condition may be different depending on the game state (normal game state, 1st RT state to 3rd RT state) at the time of winning RB, winning a prize, and the game state (normal game state, 1st RT state to 3rd RT state) and display mode (normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode). .

(4) In the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB, the value of the AT counter C associated to win the AT mode transition may be different between the first RB state and the second RB state. The number of AT counters C associated with the AT mode transition winning may be different, such that the second RB state is easier or harder to win than the second RB state. Further, in the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB, the value of the AT counter C associated with the AT mode transition winning is different depending on the game state and display mode when the RB is won, when the prize is won, and when the game ends. good too. Also, depending on the set value, the value of the AT counter C associated with the AT mode transition win may differ. In these cases, the AT counters C may be set so that the winning probabilities do not differ or are about the same although the values of the associated AT counters C are different.

(5) Depending on the content of the game until the conditions for ending the RB state are satisfied, the value of the AT counter C associated with the AT mode transition lottery at the end may differ so that the AT mode transition is won. . For example, the value of the AT counter C for AT mode transition winning may differ according to the number of times the RB medium-strong cherry is won during the RB state. The value of the AT counter C may be set to , and although the value of the AT counter C for winning the AT mode transition differs depending on the number of winning times, the probability of winning the AT mode transition may not differ or be the same. good.

(6) The RB state has been described on the premise that medals are more likely to be paid out than in the state before transition, which is advantageous for the player. It may be in a state in which it becomes difficult and disadvantageous to the player. Also, the AT mode has been described on the premise that it is more advantageous for the player than in the previous modes because the number of medals held can be expected to increase due to the notification of the pressing order. A mode that is disadvantageous to the player may be employed in which the pressing order notification is less likely to occur or the disadvantageous pressing order notification is more likely to occur.

(7) The lottery information storage area 106f is configured to be able to store pending information (AT counter C information) for the number of games smaller than the number of games required to satisfy the conditions for ending the RB state. However, it may be possible to store pending information for the number of games greater than the number of games required to satisfy the condition for ending the RB state. In this configuration, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB can be performed using the AT counter C acquired before the RB state transition. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which an RB prize is established or not established (RB may be missed) so that the player can adjust the transition game to the RB state. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property such that the content of the AT mode shift lottery at the end of the RB is adjusted by the AT counter C obtained in advance and the game to shift to the RB state.

(8) At the end of the RB, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the pre-obtained AT counter C, but at the end of the RB, is it possible to grant benefits using the pre-obtained random number information? It is good also as a structure which performs lottery of no. For example, by using information of random numbers obtained in advance, a lottery may be performed at the end of the RB to determine whether or not to generate a setting suggestion effect, and a lottery to determine whether to display a rare image may be performed at the end of the RB. Alternatively, a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode or a lottery for moving to a special zone where the odds of winning the additional lottery are higher may be performed at the end of the RB.

Moreover, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one of these lotteries is performed, and a configuration in which a plurality of lotteries are performed at the end of the RB may be employed. In this case, for example, if the RB state ends in the first game (e.g., the eighth game after the start of RB), it is easy to win the first lottery (e.g., AT mode shift lottery), but it is different from the first lottery. It is difficult to win the second lottery (for example, a lottery for generating a setting suggestion effect), and if the RB state is ended in a game different from the first game (for example, the ninth game after the start of RB), the first lottery is won. Different results may be obtained by changing the end game according to the value of the counter stored for each game and the content of the lottery, such as the fact that the second lottery is more likely to be won while it is difficult.

(9) Although the first special image P1 to the third special image P3 have been described as the hold display corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the form of the hold display is not limited to this. , may be other aspects, and the type is not limited to the above. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the AT counter C and the displayed pending display are associated one-to-one, a plurality of pending displays associated with one AT counter C are provided, and from the plurality of pending displays It is good also as a structure which determines the pending|holding display to display through lottery etc. so that one pending|holding display can be selected and displayed.

(10) Although the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in each game during the second RB state, for example, execution of the AT mode transition lottery may be restricted or allowed depending on the lottery results of each game during the second RB state. If the lottery result of each game in the second RB state is RB mid-high cherry with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value or RB wins the first hand, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. is limited, while the execution of the AT mode shift lottery may be permitted in the case of winning the second or third RB hand with no difference in winning probability due to the set value.

(11) While the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the end game of the second RB state, execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the previous games, but the AT mode transition lottery is executed before the end game. For example, in the carryover state from the second RB winning game to the winning game, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, while in each game in the second RB state AT mode The configuration may be such that execution of the transition lottery is permitted.

(12) Depending on the operating mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in each game in the second RB state, the RB ending game may be delayed, and the execution game for the AT mode transition lottery may vary. It is sufficient that the execution game of the AT mode transition lottery is different depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the game in which the execution of the lottery is restricted. Not limited to state. For example, the second RB may be carried over. In addition, on the premise that the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the end game of the second RB state, the configuration is made to move the end game back and forth. In the game during the second RB state, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, and the end game changes depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the game during the second RB state, thereby after the second RB state ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution game of the AT mode transition lottery is also different.

(13) In the second RB state in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, the ending game is changed depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the RB medium-high cherry winning game. A configuration may be adopted in which the ending game is changed depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined replay winning game in the 2RB state.

(14) The lottery table in the second RB state is not limited to the above. For example, it may be possible to win a winning combination with no set difference in winning probability, or to be able to win a predetermined replay, or to be able to win a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers. can be In addition, it is also possible to provide a configuration in which a predetermined ending combination can be won, and a case where the second RB state ends or a case where it does not end depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the predetermined ending combination is won. When a predetermined ending combination is won, the second RB state may be terminated regardless of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. In the configuration for ending the second RB state regardless of the operation mode when a predetermined ending combination is won, a different termination condition is also set, and success or failure of the different termination condition is made different depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44. It is preferable to have a configuration that allows

(15) In a configuration in which the final game in the second RB state differs depending on the result of the game in the second RB state, the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of the result of the final game, but the AT mode transition depends on the game result. In the configuration in which the game for which the lottery is performed changes, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed regardless of the result of the game. For example, when the number of times a predetermined minor win wins (the number of times the bell is won in the pressing order) or the number of times a predetermined minor win wins (the number of times the first minor win wins) during the normal game state reaches a specific number, the AT mode shift lottery , and the result of the game may not be referred to when the specific number is reached and the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

(16) The configurations of the first JAC state and the second JAC state are not limited to those described above. For example, in the first JAC state, only the first JAC minor win is won, and in the second JAC state, only the second JAC minor win is won, but in the first JAC state, the first and second JAC minor wins can be won. In addition to the configuration, the first JAC minor winning combination may be easier to win than the second JAC minor winning combination, or the first JAC minor winning combination and the second JAC minor winning combination may be won in the second JAC state. The second JAC minor winning combination may be more easily won than the first JAC minor winning combination. Also, the JAC state is terminated based on the number of times the JAC minor combination has been won (the number of winnings) reaches the specified number (three times), but the number of games in the JAC state is a specified number (for example, five times). In this case, when the number of games in the JAC state reaches a predetermined number, the number of wins of the JAC minor combination (the number of wins) has reached the predetermined number. The configuration may be such that the JAC state ends even if there is none.

(17) In a configuration in which JAC can be won during the RB state, a configuration may be adopted in which the termination condition of the RB state is met when the number of JAC wins or the number of JAC states reaches a specified number (for example, two times). In this case, if the RB state ends based on the end of the JAC state when the specified number is reached, the AT mode shift lottery may be performed in the end game.

(18) Execution of hold display during RB state Tully was set as the trigger for the lottery, but 1st hand in RB, 2nd hand in RB, 3rd hand in RB, result of failure, pushing order bell For example, another result may be used as a trigger for the execution lottery, and the number of triggers may be more than one. In this case, a result with a set difference in winning probability may be used as a trigger, or a result without a set difference may be used as a trigger. Furthermore, the trigger may be a result that may be missed, or may be a result that is not likely to be missed. In these, not only the presence or absence of the execution lottery, but also the probability of winning the execution lottery may be varied. For example, it is easy to win the execution lottery with the RB medium-strong cherry, and it is difficult to win the execution lottery with the 1st hand of the RB. , when the RB medium-strong cherry is won, it is possible to make it easier to win the execution lottery when the RB medium-strong cherry is not won than when the winning of the RB medium-strong cherry is established, or vice versa. In addition, it may be configured such that the execution lottery for the display for holding is performed in each game regardless of the lottery result of the game. Furthermore, the winning probability of the execution lottery of the display for suspension may be changed according to the number of games played during the RB state, and the winning probability may be set so that the larger the number of games played, the easier it is to win. Although a set difference is provided for the winning probability in the execution lottery, it may be set so that there is no set difference.

(19) Based on the second re-game winning, the advantageous section is ended and shifted to the normal section, but the game result that triggers the end of the advantageous section is not limited to the second re-game winning, other results may be For example, a predetermined end result is set as the lottery result of each game, and based on the predetermined end result winning, or based on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the predetermined end result winning game (predetermined Depending on whether or not there is a winning as a result of the end result, and the stop pattern at the time of winning, the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be started. In a configuration in which whether or not the advantageous section ends depends on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when a predetermined end result is won, the notification of the operation mode that enables the advantageous section to end is used as a specific notification, and an auxiliary display is provided. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which it is performed by the unit 65 or the like. Also, the game that ends the advantageous section is not limited to the winning game with the predetermined end result. Then, in a situation where the predetermined end result is won, the advantage section may be ended by establishing the winning of the predetermined end result. That is, in a configuration in which a predetermined end result winning game and a predetermined end result winning game are different, the advantageous interval is not terminated in the predetermined end result winning game, but the advantageous interval is terminated in the predetermined end result winning game. good too.

(20) The end condition of the advantageous interval may be established by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 when the number of games AG in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (100, 200, 300, etc.). In this case, if there is an AT counter C within a specific range as the stored AT counter C before reaching the predetermined number, the advantageous section can be ended when the predetermined number is reached. However, if there is no AT counter C within a specific range, the operation mode may not be notified even if the number reaches a predetermined number.

(21) In each game state, it is possible to win the fall replay that triggers the end of the advantageous section, but the game state may include a game state in which the fall replay is not won. In addition, the probability of winning the fall replay in each game state is not limited to the above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is easier to win the falling replay than in the game state corresponding to the AT mode.

(22) Although the advantageous interval is terminated when the second re-game winning is established or the second re-game winning is established by the third stop symbol, a specific notification is made as a condition for ending the advantageous interval. It may be configured to include that For example, even if the second re-game winning is established, if the specific notification is not performed, the advantageous section is not terminated, and if the second re-game winning is established in the situation where the specific notification is performed, the advantageous section is terminated. It may be configured to allow

(23) In the case of making a specific notification that the second re-game win is established and the advantageous interval is ended, it is possible to establish the first re-game win and not end the advantageous interval. Although the configuration is such that the notification is also performed, any notification may be used as long as it is possible to specify an operation mode that allows the end of the advantageous section. Even in this case, a player who does not want to end the advantageous interval may operate in an operation mode different from that operation mode, and it is possible to prevent the advantageous interval from ending.

(24) A configuration that performs a specific notification that enables the end of the advantageous section on the condition that the AT counter C is within a specific range that is likely to be won if it is offered to the AT mode transition lottery during the normal section. However, a configuration may be adopted in which specific notification is made to allow the advantageous section to end regardless of the AT counter C. FIG. In this case, for example, if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the number of games in the advantageous section is set so that an event disadvantageous to the player occurs as a penalty game. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific notification is made to allow the advantageous section to end before reaching a predetermined number of games.

(25) Although the specific notification is performed when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section are about to be satisfied, the specific notification may be performed when the AT mode reaches a predetermined number of games during the AT mode. . For example, when the number of AT mode execution games reaches 50 games or more as the first predetermined number of games, a specific notification lottery is passed, a specific notification winning flag is set, and an AT counter C within a specific range reaches a predetermined area. If a configuration is adopted in which a specific notification is executed when a falling replay win is made in the existing situation, it is possible to realize game characteristics such that when the AT mode reaches the first predetermined number of games or more, it becomes easier to play consecutively. In this case, when the second predetermined number of games, which is larger than the first predetermined number of games, reaches 60 games, the AT mode is terminated, and the period during which the specific notification can be performed is limited. Game features such as how to acquire an AT counter C within a specific range and game features such as winning a fall replay in a situation where the AT counter C within the specific range is stored are added, which has never been done before. It is possible to realize novel playability.

In addition, instead of the number of games executed in the AT mode, the number of paid out medals or the number of increased medals in the AT mode may define whether or not to execute the specific notification. When the specified number (100) or more is reached, the specific notification winning flag is set through a specific notification lottery, etc., and when the AT counter C within the specific range exists in the predetermined area, the falling replay is won. It is good also as a structure which performs specific alert|reporting. In this case as well, when the second predetermined number, which is larger than the first predetermined number, reaches 120 sheets, the AT mode is ended, and the period during which the specific notification can be performed is limited. In addition, game features such as whether to acquire AT counter C within a specific range and game features such as whether to win a fall replay in a situation where AT counter C within the specific range is stored are added, unprecedented novelty. It is possible to realize a great playability.

(26) When the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, it is easier to win the specific notification lottery than when neither excess flag is set. The likelihood of winning the specific information lottery may vary depending on whether the excess flag is set. In addition, after the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the number of winning times of the game result that triggers the extra lottery, or even after the excess flag is set, the number of games to be added if the extra game is performed. The probability of winning the specific information lottery may be varied accordingly, and the probability of winning the specific information lottery becomes higher as the number of wins of the game result that triggers the additional lottery increases or as the number of additional games increases. may be

(27) As the first specific role, in addition to the normal replay and pushing order bell that are easy to win, so-called rare roles such as strong cherry and weak cherry are set that are difficult to win. If the push order bell is included, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the probability of winning the first specific hand as a winning opportunity in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within the specific range. .

(28) When the AT mode transition lottery is held in the first specific role, if the AT counter C is within the specific range, the winning will be won regardless of the type of the first specific role. The value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition may be different depending on the type of the game. In this case, for example, in normal replay, the AT mode transition is won when the AT counter C is "0" to "80", and in the push order bell, when the AT counter C is "11" to "70", the AT mode transition is won. Then, in the non-questioning bell, the AT counter C is "15" to "91", and the AT mode transition is won. (in the above example, "15" to "70") may exist, and the common portion may be set as the specific range. The same applies to the second specific combination, and the value of the AT counter C for winning the AT mode may be changed according to the type of the second specific combination.

(29) If you win the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the 1st special role or the 2nd special role, regardless of the type of the 1st special role or the 2nd special role, common processing (common AT mode benefits setting process), but the subsequent processing may be changed depending on the type of the first specific role or the second specific role in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery. It is good also as composition with which the kind of mode, benefit, etc. differ. For example, as the first specific role, it is better to win AT mode transition with strong cherry or weak cherry as the first specific role than if you win AT mode transition with normal replay or push order bell. However, the configuration may be such that the AT mode is set to be advantageous for the player (for example, the number of initial games is higher in strong cherries, etc.).

(30) Although the winning probability does not change depending on the game state, it is set as the first specific role or the second specific role. For example, a specific replay in which a cherry replay or a watermelon play can be established may be included in the second specific combination.

(31) In the case of shifting from an advantageous section to a normal section, the first specific role is won before returning to the advantageous section, and the AT mode transition wins. All the results may be included as the lottery results. In this case, by ensuring that the lottery results of each game do not fall out, it is possible to perform the AT mode transition lottery for the first special role regardless of the game lottery results in the normal section. As a configuration that does not cause a loss, for example, a specific result that causes a predetermined number of medals (one medal) to be paid out, which is less than other payout results when winning, is provided, and in each of the above embodiments, the point value corresponding to the loss result is provided. By allocating the PV to the specific result, it is possible to reduce the influence on the increase/decrease in the number of medals per game, while preventing the occurrence of a failure. In this case, the AT counter C corresponding to the first specific hand is not limited to the above. may Then, with all the above results as the first specific role, if it is the first specific role, if you win the advantageous section transition lottery with a high probability (100%), in the normal section, the first Approximately 20% of the games that serve as a specific role win the AT mode transition lottery and shift to the advantageous section, and other than that, the AT mode transition lottery is not won and the transition to the advantageous section can be made. . In other words, it is possible to implement a game feature such that only one game is executed in the normal section, and a predetermined percentage of the one game wins the AT mode transition lottery.

(32) In the case of shifting from an advantageous section to a normal section, returning to the advantageous section per game in a configuration where AT mode transition winning is achieved by winning the first specific role before returning to the advantageous section. The probability (probability that the game will not result in an error) may differ depending on the set value, and the probability of returning to the advantageous section per game may differ depending on the game state when shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section.

(33) In the case of shifting from an advantageous section to a normal section, if the first specific role is won before returning to the advantageous section, and the AT mode transition is won, if the first specific role is the AT mode Depending on the number of AT counters C within a specific range that are transition winning stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the presence or absence of specific notification may be changed. 3) or more can be stored, the specific notification can be executed when the drop replay is won.

(34) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long period of time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(35) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(36) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
Game state transition means (main control A gaming machine having a function of executing bonus state processing by the device 101,
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, a specific lottery for whether or not to cause a predetermined specific event (AT mode shift) is performed after the game in which the specific information is acquired. Specific lottery means executable in the game (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means that causes the specific event (main controller 101 to shift to AT mode) function to execute processing for
with
The specific lottery means is characterized by having a means capable of executing the specific lottery when the condition for ending the specific state is satisfied (function for executing AT lottery process at the end by the main controller 101). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine, if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. Since the specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event using the information is performed in the game after the game in which the specific information was obtained, the specific information is not used in the specific lottery using the specific information. It is configured to be acquired in advance, and a game property completely different from that of a conventional slot machine, such as simply associating the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the revolving body, is realized.

Moreover, in a situation where the game state is the specific state, the specific lottery is performed even when the end condition for ending the specific state is satisfied. Therefore, the specific lottery performed at the end of the specific state is performed using the specific information obtained in the game before the game in which the specific state ends, that is, during the specific state. By doing so, the enjoyment of whether or not to satisfy the end condition after the acquisition condition is satisfied in the game in the specific state is added. In other words, if the specific event is favorable to the player, the player will try to satisfy the end condition while hoping that the specific event will occur, and if the specific event is unfavorable, the player will not expect the specific event to occur. It is thought that they try to establish the termination condition while wishing for On the other hand, if the specific state is advantageous to the player, it is not preferable for the player to satisfy the end condition, and if the specific state is disadvantageous, the player feels the opposite. In other words, the relationship between the advantage and disadvantage of the specific state and the advantage and disadvantage of the specific event makes it possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the end condition is met, thereby improving the game.

It should be noted that the ``specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information'' may be expressed as ``specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information'', can be expressed as a specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information. Such changes in representation are also applicable to other features and other feature groups.

Feature A2. The specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire the specific information in each game as the game progresses,
An erasing means (a function of executing pending shift processing by the main controller 101) capable of sequentially erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses,
The characteristic feature A1 according to A1, wherein the erasing means is capable of erasing the specific information regardless of whether or not the specific information is used in the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information in each game, and the acquired specific information is sequentially erased regardless of whether or not the specific lottery is targeted for the specific lottery by the specific lottery means. That is, the specific lottery is performed using the specific information associated with the game in which the end condition is satisfied and the specific lottery is performed, among the specific information sequentially deleted in each game in the specific state. By doing so, in the game such as which specific information among the acquired specific information is used to perform the specific lottery, the selection of the specific information is closely related to the success or failure timing of the end condition during the specific state. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the progress of the game during the specific state, and to improve the interest of the game during the specific state.

It should be noted that the ``erasing means capable of sequentially erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses'' is defined as ``the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses. It may be expressed as "shifting means capable of sequentially shifting the specified information". When this expression is used, the expression corresponding to "erasing means" may be appropriately changed to "shifting means" or the like. In addition, "as the game progresses, it is possible to sequentially erase the specific information acquired by the specific information acquiring means the earliest among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. It may be expressed as "erasing means".

Feature A3. Regarding the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, a specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific information is the target of the specific lottery is provided. Before becoming, characterized in that it has a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a pending display process by the display control device 81) that can be executed by a predetermined notification means A1 or A2 characterized by The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to play the specific state while ascertaining whether or not the player wins the specific lottery by satisfying the conditions for ending the specific state from the content of the specific notification. By doing so, it is possible to favorably play a game that utilizes the relationship between the advantage and disadvantage caused by the end of the specific state and the advantage and disadvantage caused by the specific event.

Feature A4. The specific notification executing means is capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery in a game prior to the game in which the end condition of the specific state is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the player can participate in determining whether or not the condition for ending the specific state is satisfied, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for ending the specific state is met while watching the specific notification, Even if the success or failure of the end condition depends entirely on the lottery on the game machine side, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the result of the lottery in relation to the specific notification.

Feature A5. An execution lottery means (a function of executing a holding display lottery process by the display control device 81) that performs a lottery for whether or not to perform the specific notification by the specific notification execution means,
Characteristic A3 or characterized in that the specific notification executing means executes the specific notification based on the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification; The gaming machine according to feature A4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is performed through the execution lottery by the execution lottery means, it is possible to generate randomness in the execution performance of the specific notification. As a result, even if specific notification is not performed as prior notification of the specific information that has been obtained in advance, specific notification will be performed because the specific information that has been obtained in advance is not the desired specific information. It becomes difficult to understand whether the specific notification is not performed because the specific notification execution lottery is not won or the specific notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the configuration for performing the specific notification of the specific information obtained in advance lowers the degree of attention in advance.

Feature A6. The execution lottery means is a number lottery means (executing a holding display lottery process by the display control device 81) that draws lots for the number of the specific information to be targeted for the specific notification when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification execution means. function),
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification corresponding to the number of the specific information based on the lottery result of the number lottery means.

In games where the end game is adjusted while predicting a specific lottery at the end of a specific state based on specific information acquired in advance, the number of specific information to be subject to specific notification regarding the details of the specific lottery at the end of the game is This is very useful for the game, and the more the number of pieces of specific information targeted for specific notification, the more effectively the end game can be adjusted. In the above configuration, since the number is determined by lottery, it is possible not only to simply perform specific notification, but also to draw attention to the number and the number lottery, thereby suitably increasing the attention of the game. be able to.

Feature A7. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, wherein the winning probability of the predetermined lottery by the execution lottery means can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

As in the above configuration, by providing a setting difference in the ease of execution of the specific notification, etc., it is possible to adjust the increase rate of the game media through the ease of adjustment of the end game, and the specific lottery. It is possible to more suitably diversify the game based on the setting difference rather than setting the setting difference directly.

The "predetermined lottery by the execution lottery means" is, for example, an "executed lottery" or a "lottery for the number of pieces of specific information targeted for specific notification".

Feature A8. When a plurality of pieces of the specific information are stored in the specific information storage means, the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification for each piece of specific information,
The number of the specific notifications executed by the specific notification executing means is set to be smaller than the minimum number of games from the transition to the specific state to the satisfaction of the end condition. The game machine according to any one of A3 to A7.

According to the above configuration, by performing the specific notification during the specific state, it is possible to play the specific state while grasping in advance the content of the specific lottery when the condition for ending the specific state is satisfied. , Since the number of specific notifications is set to be less than the minimum number of games in the specific state, even if the specific notification is performed immediately after the specific state starts, it will take a while after the specific state starts. , the content of the specific notification has nothing to do with the specific lottery at the end of the specific state. Further, even if the specific notification is performed after a while from the start of the specific state, the acquired specific information is notified in advance by the specific notification in the game before the condition for ending the specific state is satisfied. functions are guaranteed. In this way, by narrowing down the timing of drawing attention to the specific lottery at the end of the specific state to near the end of the specific state, the interest in the specific lottery at the end of the specific state reduces the enjoyment of the specific state itself. can be avoided.

Feature A9. When the game result of the predetermined game in the specific state is the first result (the game result of the game in which the number of remaining payouts is 15 or less is the result of winning a small winning combination of 15 payouts), in the predetermined game or a subsequent game While the end condition is satisfied, a second result in which the game result in the predetermined game is different from the first result (the game result in the game with the remaining payout number of 15 or less is 15 payouts and a small winning combination is not established. result), the game according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the end condition is not satisfied in the predetermined game or a subsequent game, or is less likely to be satisfied than in the case of the first result. machine.

According to the above configuration, the end condition may or may not be satisfied based on the game result in the predetermined game during the specific state. Therefore, the specific lottery may or may not be performed depending on the game result of the predetermined game. In this way, the presence or absence of execution of the specific lottery and the execution timing are changed depending on the game result in the predetermined game during the specific state, and the game property is realized, and the game property during the specific state is favorably improved. be able to.

Feature A10. A predetermined first end result (for example, RB medium strong cherry) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result of the lottery means in the predetermined game is the first end result, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (operation mode for establishing a 15-card payout minor winning combination), the A game result of a predetermined game is the first result,
A lottery result by the lottery means in the predetermined game is the first end result, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (an operation mode that does not establish a 15-card payout minor winning combination). ), the game result of the predetermined game becomes the second result.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the end condition is met differs depending on the mode of operation of the stop operation means by the player. Therefore, there is room for the player to intervene whether or not to receive the specific lottery, encouraging active participation in the game and improving the interest in the game.

Feature A11. A predetermined second end result different from the first end result (e.g., RB first win, RB second win, RB third win) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means. ,
When the lottery result of the lottery means in the predetermined game is the second end result, the game result of the predetermined game is the first result regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. The gaming machine described in A10.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the predetermined game is the second end result, the end condition is satisfied without any room for player's intervention, and interest in the lottery result of each game can be increased. become able to. In particular, as in feature A9, in the case of the first end result, the success or failure of the end condition can be controlled by the player's operation. Even if the execution game of the specific lottery is desired to be postponed in relation to the specific information, there are cases where the game is not as desired by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature A12. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, wherein the probability that the game result of the predetermined game is the second result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the increase/decrease mode and increase/decrease rate of the game media depending on whether or not the execution timing of the specific lottery can be adjusted. This makes it possible to vary the rate of occurrence of specific events depending on the set value.

Feature A13. A characteristic characterized in that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means will result in a result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is a common probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The gaming machine described in A12.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific event is made different depending on the setting value depending on whether or not the execution timing of the specific lottery is adjusted, on the premise that the winning probability itself of the specific lottery does not differ depending on the set value. becomes possible.

Feature A14. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
As the specific state, there is no difference between a first specific state (second RB state) in which there is a difference in the probability of winning at least according to the set value set by the setting means for the transition lottery to the specific state, and a difference in the probability of winning. A second specific state (first RB state) is set,
The probability that the termination condition is satisfied in the first specific state and the probability that the termination condition is satisfied in the second specific state are set so that there is no difference between the set values set by the setting means. ,
The specific lottery means can execute the specific lottery based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the first specific state, and the specific lottery based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the second specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein a lottery can be executed.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that there is no set difference in the establishment probability of the end condition in any of the first specific state and the second specific state, the first specific state with a set difference in the transition probability It is possible to execute a specific lottery based on the completion of conditions for ending both the state and the second specific state. By doing so, even if there is a configuration in which a setting difference cannot be provided as a trigger for executing the specific lottery, it is possible to provide a setting difference in the execution of the specific lottery.

Feature A15. The specific lottery means is configured to be able to execute the specific lottery in each game in the specific state,
When the result of the specific lottery in each game in the specific state is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification of the result is the specific lottery based on the establishment of the end condition of the specific state. Any one of the features A1 to A14, characterized by comprising means (function for executing the processing of steps S916, S920 and S921 by the main controller 101) that can be executed as notification of the result of The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the notification of the result of the specific lottery in the game in the specific state may be performed as the notification of the result of the specific lottery based on the fulfillment of the end condition. By doing so, for example, even if the specific lottery based on the establishment of the termination condition is not won, if the player wins in the previous specific lottery, the notification to that effect is sent to the specific lottery based on the establishment of the termination condition. This can be done at the time of notification of the result, and it is possible to make the winning probability of the specific lottery based on the completion of the termination condition seem higher than the actual probability.

By applying the above configuration to the configuration of feature A14, it is possible to reduce the difference in presentation between a specific state in which a specific lottery can be performed when conditions for transitioning to a specific state are satisfied and a specific state in which it is not. It is possible.

Feature A16. When the specific lottery means performs the specific lottery using predetermined specific information based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the specific state, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game in which the specific lottery is performed The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the results of the specific lottery are common.

According to the above configuration, when the specific lottery at the end of the specific state is performed using the same specific information, the lottery result of the game at the end of the specific state is not affected by the specific lottery. Therefore, the result of the specific lottery is determined by the game that satisfies the end condition and the specific information obtained in advance. will be aggregated. In other words, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the result of a specific lottery is overturned by the lottery result of the end game even though the end game has been adjusted well, and the end game can be adjusted. It becomes possible to suitably improve amusement.

Feature A17. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd to 26th minor wins) that can provide a different profit than the first operation result by being operated in a different second operation mode results in a winning mode (for example, pressing order bell) is set,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the result of the mode, a mode notification execution means (main controller) capable of executing mode notification related to the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means 101) to execute the pressing order notification process),
Any one of the characteristics A1 to A16, wherein the specific lottery means performs, as the specific lottery, a lottery for shifting to a notification state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, as a lottery result by the lottery means, there is provided a mode result in which a different profit is awarded depending on whether the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Since there is a case where mode notification about the operation mode is performed in a specific state when the mode result is won, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the profit given to the player is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. . Moreover, the specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the transition to the notification state in which such mode notification is performed uses the specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means, It will be performed based on the fulfillment of the end condition of a specific state. For this reason, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that have not existed in the past, such as whether or not to move to the notification state is determined depending on how the ending game in the specific state is adjusted with the specific information.

Feature A18. The termination condition of the specific state is established when the number of game media paid out as the privilege by the privilege granting means or the increased number of game media in the particular state reaches a predetermined upper limit. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the payout number or the increase number of game media in a specific state reaches the upper limit, the condition for ending the specific state is established and the specific lottery is performed. This means that the upper limit number of game media has been paid out. In other words, by making it difficult to perform actions such as ending the specific state in the middle before reaching the upper limit number because they want to receive the specific lottery at the end of the specific state, for example, transitioning and ending the specific state Inconvenience that the configuration that uses the number of payouts of game media in a specific state in managing with a computer etc. will not be used well (it will not be possible to grasp the transition or end of the specific state). can be made difficult to occur.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
a specific lottery means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) capable of executing a specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause a predetermined specific event (AT mode shift) in a specific game;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event a function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode),
In a predetermined game in a specific state (second RB state) in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted, when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the specific game is the first game. Become a specific game,
In the predetermined game in the specific state, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the specific game is a game after the first specific game. A gaming machine characterized by being a second specific game.

According to the above configuration, in a predetermined game in a specific state in which the execution of the specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event is restricted, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the specific lottery is the first. While it is performed in the specific game, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the predetermined game, the specific lottery is performed in the second specific game after the first specific game. In this case, if the specific lottery is to be held earlier, the first operation mode is used, and if the specific lottery is to be held later, the second operation mode is used. Execution of a specific lottery is restricted in a game in which an operation mode is performed. That is, by adopting such a configuration, even in a situation (specific state) in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted, it is possible to play the game while keeping the player's interest in the specific lottery from diminishing. Moreover, not only does the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed change depending on the lottery result of the game in that situation, but also the specific game changes depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means in that situation. There is room for intervention in the game, and interest in the game can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Feature B2. The privilege imparting means imparts a first privilege in the predetermined game when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the predetermined game, and the stop operation means is operated in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein when operated in the operation mode, a second privilege different from the first privilege is awarded in the predetermined game.

According to the above configuration, if the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed is changed, the benefits in that game will be different. By doing so, it is possible to make the player decide whether or not to play the game of feature B1 from the viewpoint of changing the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed by changing the benefits in the game. , the interest in the game is further enhanced.

Feature B3. The second privilege is less advantageous for the player than the first privilege,
There is a first specific situation in which, when the specific lottery is performed in the first specific game, the result of the specific lottery is more likely to become the specific result than when the specific lottery is performed in the second specific game. In addition, when the specific lottery is performed in the first specific game, the result of the specific lottery is higher than when the specific lottery is performed in the second specific game. The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that a second specific situation that is unlikely to result can occur.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode so as to postpone the game in which the specific lottery is held, the second privilege with a low profit for the player in the predetermined game is provided. In this case, if the result of the specific lottery causes a specific event, there may be a first specific situation in which a specific result is likely to occur, and a second specific situation in which a specific result is unlikely to occur. It may occur. Thus, even if the user selects the second operation mode in which the privilege in the predetermined game is disadvantageous, it does not necessarily make it easier to win the postponed specific lottery. In some cases, it becomes easier to win the specific lottery when the first operation mode in which the benefit of (1) is advantageous is selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the selection between the first operation mode and the second operation mode more carefully.

Feature B4. In the predetermined game, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (1st hand in RB, 2nd hand in RB, 3rd hand in RB), regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the specific game does not change.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the predetermined game is a special result, the specific game becomes the same game without any room for player's intervention, and in the game characteristics that the specific game can be changed depending on the operation mode, Since there are cases where things do not turn out as desired by the player, the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature B5. In the predetermined game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (RB medium-strong cherry), the specific game is stopped by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode. a specific game, and the specific game becomes the second specific game by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode;
The privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the first result is realized and the privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the second result is established are common. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, whether or not the specific lottery can be postponed depends on the result of the lottery by the lottery means. By doing so, it is possible to vary the games in which the specific lottery is performed while preventing the difference in the advantages of the games.

Feature B6. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, by the lottery means in the predetermined game The feature B5 is characterized in that the ratio of the lottery results to be the first result and the ratio of the lottery results to the second result are different, but the probability of being either the first result or the second result is common. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the specific game can be postponed depends on the setting value depending on the operation mode. can be set so that there is no difference due to the setting value. By doing so, while the possibility of changing the game in which the specific lottery is performed is made different depending on the set value, there is no setting difference in the degree of advantage in the predetermined game that allows the change. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B7. In the predetermined game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (RB medium-strong cherry), the specific game is stopped by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode. a specific game, and the specific game becomes the second specific game by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode;
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first privilege is granted as a privilege in the predetermined game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the privilege in the predetermined game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein a second privilege is provided or no privilege is provided.

According to the above configuration, if the specific game in which the specific lottery is held is postponed, the benefit of the postponed predetermined game becomes more disadvantageous or privilege for the player than the benefit of not being postponed. is not granted. Therefore, the player can choose whether or not to procrastinate with a reduced benefit to be given, which improves the amusement of the game.

Feature B8. The specific state is a state in which a privilege is likely to be granted by the privilege granting means,
The specific game is a game in which the specific state ends,
In the predetermined game, the specific state is given when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode rather than in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that benefits are reduced.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to postpone the specific lottery by changing the specific state end game even if the privilege granted during the specific state is reduced.

Feature B9. The privilege granting means is configured to pay out a number of game media corresponding to the result of winning a prize as the privilege,
The specific state is a state that ends when the number of payouts of the game media after transition reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
The specific game is a game in which the specific state ends,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first transition result (strong JAC) in which a transition to a first state (first JAC state) in which the average increase/decrease number of game media in each game is the first number is caused when winning, and a prize winning. a second transition result (weak JAC) in which transition to a second state (second JAC state) in which the average increase/decrease number of game media in each game is a second number smaller than the first number is set. cage,
In the predetermined game, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, winning of the first transition result is established, and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the winning of the second transition result is established at .

According to the above configuration, when the first state and the second state are compared, the average increase/decrease number per game is smaller in the second state, so the number of games to reach the upper limit number in the specific state is increased. In this case, the number of game media paid out during the specific state is about the same as the upper limit increase number, but considering the game media used in each game (the number of bets), the game media that actually increases in the specific state The number is lower when transitioning to the second state. In this case, increasing the number of increments during the specific state may be more advantageous than postponing the specific lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize novel gameplay utilizing the relationship between the specific lottery and the specific state.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein as the lottery result of the lottery means, a duplicate result in which the first transition result and the second transition result are overlapped and won is set.

According to the above configuration, in the specific state, the duplicate result winning game becomes the predetermined game, and the selection of whether to establish the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning is made in the same game. It is possible to make the game, which is the heart of the game, stand out more.

Feature B11. The first state ends when a specific number of games have been played or when a predetermined number of winnings have been achieved,
The gaming machine according to feature B10, wherein the second state ends when the game is played the specified number of times or when the predetermined number of wins are established.

According to the above configuration, the number of games occupied in the specific state does not change regardless of whether the state is shifted to the first state or the second state. However, as described above, the number of games until reaching the upper limit number for the specific state changes due to the difference in the average increase/decrease number. That is, the number of games in the first state and the second state does not affect the final game in the specific state, and the effect of the feature B10 can be expected while not forcibly changing the specifications in the specific state.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main controller 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) in each game based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, a specific lottery for whether or not to cause a predetermined specific event (AT mode shift) is performed after the game in which the specific information is acquired. A specific lottery means that can be executed in a specific game (a function of executing an end-time AT lottery process by the main control device 101);
As the game progresses, erasing means (main a function of executing pending shift processing by the control device 101;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode);
at least a limiting means for limiting the execution of the specific lottery in the game before the specific game (a function of executing a process of limiting the AT mode transition lottery during the second RB state by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine where if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the specific information acquisition means acquires in each game and stores it in the specific information storage means. A specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information obtained from the specific information is held in a specific game after the game in which the specific information was acquired. , the specific information is obtained in advance, and game characteristics completely different from those of conventional slot machines, such as simply associating the result of the lottery by the lottery means with the stop result of the revolving body, are realized.

Moreover, since the execution of the specific lottery is restricted in the game before the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed, the specific information that matches the specific game among the specific information acquired in each game is used for the specific lottery. In the previous game, the acquired specific information is erased without being used for the specific lottery. By doing so, as the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, there are specific information to be the target of the specific lottery and specific information not to be the target of the specific lottery. In addition to the specific game, it is possible to preferably increase interest in the game before the specific game.

Feature C2. The limiting means can limit the execution of the specific lottery in a game in which the specific information to be the target of the specific lottery in the specific game is obtained by the specific information obtaining means. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature C1. With such a configuration, the specific lottery is not only restricted in the game prior to the specific game, but also in the game in which the specific information provided for the specific lottery performed in the specific game is obtained. It becomes possible to preferably increase interest in the game before the specific game from which the specific information is acquired.

Feature C3. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
When the specific lottery means performs the specific lottery using the common specific information, a case where a first set value is set by the setting means and a second setting different from the first set value by the setting means The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result is common between the case where the value is set and the case where the value is set.

According to the above configuration, by eliminating setting differences, it is possible to prevent advantages and disadvantages between players depending on which game machine they play in a game hall where a plurality of game machines are installed. can be done. As a result, it is possible to equally enjoy the games using the specific lottery.

Further, there is no set difference in the winning probability of the specific lottery, the degree of influence of the specific information on the result of the specific lottery is increased, and any specific information among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is selected for the specific lottery. It is possible to favorably enhance the interest in a game in which it is important to be used.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the result of the game prior to the specific game can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, while it is assumed that there is no setting difference in the specific lottery performed in the specific game, it is allowed that there is a setting difference in the previous game. By doing this, it is possible to create a game that utilizes the setting difference within a range that does not affect the specific lottery, and if the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed If it is a configuration in which the specific lottery is changed, even if there is no setting difference for the specific lottery, by moving the specific game back and forth in the previous game with the setting difference, the specific information provided to the specific lottery can also be changed. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly influence the specific lottery by setting values through previous games with setting differences. By doing so, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in game design while assuming a specific lottery with no setting difference.

Feature C5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a special result (RB medium strong cherry) whose winning probability may differ depending on the setting value set by the setting means is set,
In a predetermined game in a specific situation (RB state) before the specific game, the game from the predetermined game to the specific game depending on whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result or not. The gaming machine of feature C4, wherein the number is variable.

According to the above configuration, the specific game may change depending on whether or not a lottery result with a set difference is won. The presence or absence of winning as a result is configured to affect the specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the specific lottery while assuming that the specific lottery has no setting difference.

Feature C6. Shifting means for shifting the game state to a specific state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and ending the specific state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (function for executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101). with
The specific game is set as a game in which the end condition of the specific state is established,
The gaming machine according to feature C4 or feature C5, wherein the transition condition is set such that the establishment probability varies depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the end condition of the specific state with a set difference in the establishment probability of the transition condition is satisfied, the specific lottery without the set difference is performed. By doing so, a specific lottery is performed in a set with such a specific state while changing the increase/decrease mode and increase/decrease rate of the game medium according to the transition rate to the specific state, and the specific state with a set difference. The fun of is improved.

Feature C7. As the specific state, a first specific state (second RB) in which the establishment probability of the transition condition may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means, and the establishment probability of the transition condition are set by the setting means. A second specific state (first RB) that is common regardless of the set value is set,
The specific game is set as a game in which the end condition for the first specific state is established, and is set as a game for which the end condition for the second specific state is established. The gaming machine described in C6.

According to the above configuration, in both the first specific state with the setting difference and the second specific state with no setting difference, the specific lottery is performed when the end condition is met. By doing so, it is not necessary to care about the specific lottery whether there is a setting difference when shifting to the specific state or winning, and the specific lottery and the specific state of the set can be enjoyed more. can be done.

Feature C8. The specific lottery means is configured to be able to execute the specific lottery in a predetermined game in the specific state,
When the result of the specific lottery in the predetermined game in the specific state is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the notification of the result is based on the establishment of the end condition of the specific state. Characteristic C7 characterized by having a means (function of executing the processing of steps S915, S919 and S920 by the main controller 101) that can be executed as notification of the result of the specific lottery in the game. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the notification of the result of the specific lottery when the transition lottery to the specific state is won is performed as the notification of the result of the specific lottery in the specific game based on the satisfaction of the conditions for ending the specific state. By doing so, for example, even if a specific lottery is not won in a specific game, if the specific lottery before that is won, the result of the specific lottery based on the establishment of the end condition is notified to that effect. can be performed at the time of notification, and it is possible to make the winning probability of a specific lottery in a specific game seem higher than the actual probability.

Feature C9. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and a second operation in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a manner,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode is provided by predetermined notification means (first display segments N1 to N1 on the instruction monitor 68). 7th display segment N7) has a mode notification means (a function of executing the pushing process by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the specific event causes a transition to a notification state in which mode notification can be performed by the mode notification means.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery performed based on the pre-acquired specific information is a lottery for a specific event that causes a transition to a notification state that can cause navigation of the operation mode. By doing so, a lottery method is adopted in which specific information for a lottery is acquired in advance for a game using navigation in the operation mode, and the pre-acquired specific information is sequentially erased as the game progresses, It is possible to create a novel game property such that the specific lottery is restricted in the game prior to the specific game in which the specific lottery using the information is executed.

Feature C10. An advantageous section in which transition to the notification state is possible and a normal section in which transition to the notification state does not occur or is less likely to occur than the advantageous section are set,
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the specific game can exist in both the advantageous section and the normal section.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is performed in the specific game not only in the advantageous section but also in the normal section, and the specific lottery is restricted in the games before the specific game. In other words, in the normal section, the specific lottery using the specific information acquired in the game in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted is performed in the specific game, which is the game after the game in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of scenes in which the specific lottery is performed in the normal section, and to increase the enjoyment of the specific lottery.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, a specific lottery for whether or not to cause a predetermined specific event (AT mode shift) is performed after the game in which the specific information is acquired. Specific lottery means executable in the game (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
As the game progresses, erasing means (main a function of executing pending shift processing by the control device 101;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means that causes the specific event (main controller 101 to shift to AT mode) function to execute processing for
with
When performing the specific lottery using the specific information, the specific lottery means executes the specific lottery in a predetermined specific game without using the lottery result of the lottery means when performing the specific lottery. means (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of termination by main control device 101),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (for example, RB medium-strong cherry), the specific game becomes the first specific game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the lottery result of the lottery means is a second result (for example, the first winning combination in RB), the specific game is a second specific game after the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event is performed based on the specific information acquired in advance by becoming a specific game without using the lottery results of each game. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the game is the first result, the specific game will be the first specific game, and if the lottery result of the game is the second result, the specific game will be the second specific game after the first specific game. Become. In other words, in a configuration in which the specific lottery is performed without using the lottery result of the game, the lottery result of the game indirectly affects the game (specific game) in which the specific lottery is performed. In this way, while the specific lottery and the lottery result of each game are associated, each lottery is for a separate game, so it is possible to separately set the points to be concentrated in each game. . Information of a plurality of games is involved in one specific lottery rather than a configuration in which a specific lottery is performed using the lottery result of one game and specific information, which is different from a specific game in which a specific lottery is performed. To set the fun of each game by using one specific lottery, such as drawing attention to the lottery result by a lottery means in a game and drawing attention to the specific lottery in a specific game in which the specific lottery is performed. becomes possible.

In addition, since the specific information used for the specific lottery is the specific information obtained in the game prior to the specific game, in associating a plurality of games with one specific lottery as described above, The acquired game is also related in terms of what specific information is pre-acquired. Therefore, in each game, it is possible to realize an interesting game property that is completely different from the conventional game property of performing a specific lottery using the lottery result and the specific information in one game.

Feature D2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the specific game becomes the first specific game when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is the first game. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific game becomes a game different from the first specific game when operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed becomes the first specific game or a game different from the first specific game depending on the operation mode when the lottery result of the game is the first result. Therefore, not only the specific lottery and the lottery result of each game, but also the operation mode of the game can be associated, and it is possible to dramatically increase interest in the game, including the player's intervention.

Feature D3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the specific game becomes the second specific game when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine described in D2.

According to the above configuration, depending on the operation mode in the case of the first result, the game may be the same as the specific game in the case of the second result with a different lottery result. In other words, even if it is the first result, if the player does not operate in the first operation mode, the lottery result by the lottery means will have no effect on which game the specific game will be. Become. In this way, by stipulating the degree of influence of a specific game by a player's intervention, it is possible to prevent the difference between a player who can perform the operation and a player who is not too large. can be done.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means does not affect the acquisition of the specific information acquired in advance. No specific information is obtained. Therefore, in the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed using the specific information acquired in advance, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a phenomenon that the player can not expect the specific lottery due to the lottery result of the game in advance. That is, it is possible to prevent the degree of interest in the specific lottery performed in the specific game from decreasing in advance.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the first result or the second result includes a losing result in which no combination is won in the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, even a losing result can be configured to affect the specific lottery. In other words, even if the result is a losing result, it will be involved in which specific game the specific lottery will be held, and it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the lottery result of each game.

Feature D6. A plurality of stages of setting values are provided that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease mode or rate of increase/decrease of the game medium, and setting means (main controller) for setting one of the plurality of staged setting values. 101 function to execute the setting process of the winning probability),
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means is the lost result can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the result of a win affects the specific lottery, a set difference is provided in the probability of the result of the win. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the increase/decrease rate of game media based on the winning rate of the lost result and associate it with the specific lottery. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to provide a set difference in the probability of winning a specific lottery.

Feature D7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the specific game becomes the first specific game when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is the first game. a configuration in which the specific game becomes the second specific game when operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode;
The gaming machine according to feature D5 or feature D6, wherein the specific game is the second specific game when the lottery result by the lottery means is the losing result.

According to the above configuration, the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed is the same second specific game in the case of the losing result and in the case of the first result and the operation in the second operation mode. In this case, the degree of influence of the losing result on the specific lottery is the same as the degree of influence when the first result is operated in the second operation mode. In other words, even if the player's operation intervention by the stop operation means is performed, it will have the same effect as the result of losing, and fairness can be ensured by determining the range of the player's technical intervention. Conversely, as long as the result is a loss, it is possible to give the same degree of influence to the specific lottery without any room for intervention.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd minor combination to 26th minor combination) that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from , press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed. and are set,
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific state using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information was obtained. (Function to execute AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
Specific transition means (main controller 101) for shifting to the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
With regard to the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, information in the case where the predetermined specific information is the target of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is added to the specific lottery. Preliminary comprehension means (function for executing pending display processing by the display control device 81) that can be comprehended in a game prior to the target game;
In the advantageous state, a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) can execute a specific notification that enables transition from the advantageous state to the normal state based on the result of grasping by the preceding grasping means. Specific notification execution means (function for executing processing for performing specific notification by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode as the lottery result by the lottery means. There are provided mode results in which different benefits are awarded depending on whether the player is operated or operated in the second operation mode, and when the mode result is won, mode notification of the operation mode is performed in a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit given to the player is changed depending on whether or not there is state notification. Moreover, the specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the transition to the specific state in which such mode notification is performed is performed using the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means. Since the game is performed after the game in which the information is acquired, the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, and the lottery result by the lottery means and the stop result of the orbiting body are simply obtained. A completely different game property from the conventional slot machine such as matching with is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, with respect to the predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, the information in the case where the specific lottery is targeted before the predetermined specific information becomes the target of the specific lottery. There is a case where a specific notification is made that is grasped by the prior grasping means and based thereon makes it possible to cause a transition from an advantageous state including a specific state to a normal state. Therefore, even though it is premised that the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state, if it is more advantageous to temporarily shift to the normal state, it is possible to notify it in advance. Become. As a result, by using the specific information obtained in advance, it is possible to create a new game property that breaks away from the simple game property that is advantageous only if it is in an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game. can be planned.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the predetermined transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the normal state is established using a game result.

According to the above configuration, the result of each game is not automatically shifted to the normal state even if it is preferable that the specific information that is temporarily acquired is the target of the specific lottery in the normal state. A shift to the normal state becomes possible when a transition condition that is established by use is satisfied. In this way, the advantage/disadvantage based on the special information can be obtained while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable by using the conventional game such that the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state occurs by using the result of the game. It is possible to entertain the game property using the reversal phenomenon.

Feature E3. The specific notification executing means is configured to provide a special result in which the result of the game contributes to the establishment of the predetermined transition condition (e.g., payout results such as falling replay winning that can establish a second replay winning, pushing order bell that can reach the upper limit payout number, etc.) The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific notification based on the winning).

According to the above configuration, even if the stored specific information should be the object of the specific lottery in the normal state, the specific notification is not performed, but the special result that contributes to the establishment of the predetermined transition condition. In some cases, a specific notification is made. By doing so, even if the situation should be shifted to the normal state, it is possible to prevent the notification to that effect until the situation is unavoidable, thereby preventing the dilution of the impression of the specific notification. , it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention when the specific notification is performed.

Feature E4. Based on the fact that the result of the game is the special result, the predetermined transition in which the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state occurs regardless of whether or not the specific notification is executed by the specific notification executing means. The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that the configuration is such that a condition can be established.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the presence or absence of the specific notification, the advantage state shifts to the normal state based on the special result of the game. By doing so, it is not necessary to determine the presence or absence of the specific notification when causing the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, so that the processing can be simplified and the processing can be shared. In a configuration in which the control device that manages the normal state and the control device that performs the specific notification are different, it is necessary to exchange the presence or absence of the specific notification between the control devices when the game result is a special result. does not occur.

Feature E5. Second specific notification execution means (display control device 81 The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for performing a pushing order notification effect for the first replay at the time of winning a fall replay by winning,
According to the above configuration, when a special result is obtained in the specific state, the second specific notification is made so as not to shift the advantageous state to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately ensure the superiority of the specific state in the advantageous state without making a reckless transition to the normal state even if it is a special result.

Feature E6. In the advantageous state, a third specific notification that enables the maintenance of the advantageous state based on the result of grasping by the preceding grasping means can be executed by a predetermined notifying means (auxiliary display unit 65). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, further comprising specific notification executing means (a function of executing processing for performing the second specific notification by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, if the result of grasping by the first grasping means is that it is better to maintain the advantageous state, the third specific notification that allows the maintaining of the advantageous state may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the transition to the normal state from occurring even when it is better to maintain the advantageous state, and causing the transition to the normal state is disadvantageous to the player. can be avoided.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the third specific notification execution means is configured to perform the third specific notification when the specific notification is to be performed.

According to the above configuration, basically, the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state. Rather, it is possible to avoid becoming troublesome.

Feature E8. The specific notification executing means determines that the result of grasping by the prior grasping means is that the predetermined specific information is in the normal state more than the case in which the predetermined specific information is targeted for the specific lottery in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the specific lottery target is more likely to result in the specific result.

According to the above configuration, the state in which the predetermined specific information obtained in advance is the target of the specific lottery is more likely to be shifted to the specific state in the normal state than in the advantageous state. If the result is likely to occur, a specific notification is made to enable transition to the normal state. By doing so, in the advantageous state, the specific notification is triggered to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the specific lottery for the predetermined specific information that triggered the specific notification is received in the normal state. It is possible to realize such novel game characteristics.

Feature E9. A game number grasping means capable of grasping the number of games executed in a predetermined situation in the advantageous state (a function of executing addition processing of the number AG of advantageous section games by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the specific notification executing means can execute the specific notification based on a result of grasping by the number-of-games grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed or not performed depending on the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, by changing the ease of execution of the specific notification according to the number of games in the advantageous state, it is possible to set the advantage or disadvantage in the advantageous state according to the number of games in the advantageous state. In this case, it is not necessary to substantially change the probability of the specific lottery. That is, according to the above configuration, it is possible to set the advantage and disadvantage in an advantageous state without changing the winning probability of the specific lottery, which can greatly contribute to the creation of new game features.

Feature E10. The specific notification execution means becomes executable or easier to execute the specific notification when the result of grasping by the number-of-games grasping means is a result indicating that the number of games is equal to or greater than a predetermined specific number of games. The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized by:

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E9.

Feature E11. When a predetermined forced termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the forced termination means for terminating the specific state (the main controller 101 executes termination processing based on the satisfaction of the forced termination condition in the section display second processing function) and
In the game before the forced termination condition ends, prior grasping means capable of grasping in advance that the forced termination condition is satisfied or may be satisfied (the process of step S4901 by the main controller 101 functions to perform) and
with
Any one of features E8 to E10, wherein the specific notification executing means can execute the specific notification based on the grasping result of the prior grasping means or becomes easier to execute than before. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when it is grasped in advance that the conditions for forcible termination of the advantageous state are satisfied or may be satisfied, the specific notification is likely to be performed, and the advantageous state can be changed to the normal state. It becomes easier to win the lottery for transition to the specific state. In this case, once the advantageous state shifts to the normal state, the comprehended condition for forced termination of the advantageous state will no longer be satisfied. A new advantageous state will be started and the forced termination condition can be reset. By doing so, it is possible to substantially avoid the forced termination condition, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the advantageous state.

Regarding "the specific notification becomes executable or easier to execute than before based on the grasping result of the prior grasping means", "the grasping result of the prior grasping means is the forced termination condition Based on the result that the above is established or may be established, the specific notification becomes executable or easier to execute than before."

In addition, regarding the "forced termination condition", "the number of games executed in the specific state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games, or the number of game media that can be increased in the specific state has reached a predetermined upper limit number It can also be expressed as "a specific condition established by reaching

Feature E12. The forced termination condition is satisfied when the number of game media that can be increased in a predetermined situation in the specific state reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number,
The prior grasping means can grasp that the number of game media increased in a predetermined situation in the advantageous state has reached a specific number (2350) which is a number smaller than the upper limit increase number,
When the advance grasping means grasps that the increased number of game media has reached the specific number, the specific notification execution means becomes capable of executing the specific notification or becomes easier to execute than before. is the configuration,
At least, during a period from when the advance grasping means grasps that the increased number of game media has reached the specific number to when the specific notification executing means performs the specific notification, the mode notification executing means Means capable of executing a specific mode notification of an operation mode corresponding to a result of the first operation result or the second operation result that provides less profit when a prize is won in the mode notification. (a function of executing the processing of step S5126 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the forced termination condition is established when the number of game media increases reaches the upper limit increase number, when the specific number becomes smaller than the upper limit increase number, the specific notification is performed, and the advantageous state changes to the normal state. , and the forced termination condition is reset. However, if the acquired specific information is not information that is likely to result in a specific result when the state is shifted to the normal state, there is no point in shifting to the normal state. If the state is immediately shifted to the normal state, the player suffers a great disadvantage. Therefore, after reaching the specific number, it is considered a good idea to wait in an advantageous state until specific information that makes it easy to win a specific lottery in the normal state is obtained, and waits until such specific information is obtained. In the game, when the mode result is won, the operation mode of the side with the smaller profit is notified. As a result, even though it is premised on the game property in which many game media can be acquired based on the mode result winning, when the forced termination condition is about to be satisfied, the payout of the game media is effectively reduced. While making adjustments, the waiting game can be performed. As a result, while making the most of the superiority of the advantageous state, it is possible to realize novel gameplay such as once ending the advantageous state and then shifting to the advantageous state again.

Feature E13. Equipped with a remaining number grasping means (AT mode continuation number counter) capable of grasping the remaining number of the advantageous state,
The prior grasping means can grasp that the forced termination condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means,
The specific notification executing means becomes capable of executing the specific notification or executes it more than before based on the fact that the forced termination condition is satisfied by the prior grasping means based on the remaining number. The gaming machine according to feature E11 or feature E12, characterized in that it becomes easier to play.

When it is understood that the forced termination condition is satisfied based on the remaining number of advantageous states, it is conceivable that the forced termination condition is satisfied before the remaining number is exhausted. Then, specific notification is performed as a compensation for the difference. As a result, it is possible to follow up the feeling of loss caused by not being able to use up the remaining number with a privilege such as re-transition to a new advantageous state by specific notification.

Feature E14. Any one of features E1 to E13, wherein the specific notification executing means is configured to be capable of executing the specific notification based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition in the specific state. The game machine described.

The above configuration defines that a specific notification can be performed in a specific state during an advantageous state. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to realize continuous property across advantageous states, such as once ending the specific state together with the advantageous state by specific notification, and then shifting to the specific state again. Become.

Feature E15. Advantageous transition lottery means (function for executing advantageous zone transition lottery processing by main controller 101) that performs a lottery for transition from the normal state to the advantageous state using the lottery result of the lottery means,
The advantageous transition lottery means executes the transition lottery with all the lottery results except for the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result, and the transition lottery is performed so as not to be unsuccessful in the transition lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E14, wherein a lottery is executed.

The above configuration is based on the premise of a cycle of normal state→advantage state→specific state→normal state. With such a configuration, even if the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state is caused by the specific notification, the new advantageous state will soon be restored. In other words, by lowering the hurdles for shifting from the normal state to the advantageous state, the hurdles for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state are also lowered, and the advantage of shifting to the normal state can be emphasized.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd minor combination to 26th minor combination) that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from , press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed. and are set,
If a predetermined specific result (specific combination, predetermined end result, second replay) is won in the advantageous state, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the While ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state, if the stop operating means is operated in a second operating mode different from the first operating mode, the advantageous state is not terminated. (a function of executing a process for ending an advantageous section by winning a second replay when winning a fall replay, for example, by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode as the lottery result by the lottery means. There are provided mode results in which different benefits are awarded depending on whether the player is operated or operated in the second operation mode, and when the mode result is won, mode notification of the operation mode is performed in a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit given to the player is changed depending on whether or not there is state notification. Moreover, such a specific state is included in the advantageous state, and mode notification is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, the advantageous state can be said to be more advantageous to the player in terms of game characteristics using the mode notification.

On the other hand, for example, there are needs of players who do not want to transition to an advantageous state or maintain an advantageous state. In some cases, such as when waiting for a transition to a specific state in a situation close to the conditions for forced termination in an advantageous state, it may be advantageous to terminate the advantageous state once. However, leaving the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state to the player is not preferable in terms of game management and anti-fraud measures.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to end the advantageous state when the specific result is won and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the advantageous state can be ended. can be determined by the player's will, and the lottery by the game machine is involved in it, so that whether or not the advantageous state ends can be appropriately managed in a well-balanced manner.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the second operation mode is easier to operate than the first operation mode.

By adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to avoid the event of erroneously ending the advantageous state as much as possible.

Feature F3. The specifying means terminates the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result and the first specified pattern combination stops at the effective position, while the lottery result by the lottery means is the above-mentioned. The advantageous state is not terminated when a second specified pattern combination, which is a specified result and is different from the first specified pattern combination, stops at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the number of types of the second specific pattern combination is set to be greater than the number of types of the first specific pattern combination.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F2. In particular, if the number of associated picture pattern combinations is made different as in the above configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in operational difficulty between the first operation mode and the second operation mode with a relatively simple configuration. Become.

Feature F4. The specifying means terminates the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result and the first specified pattern combination stops at the effective position, while the lottery result by the lottery means is the above-mentioned. The advantageous state is not terminated when a second specified pattern combination, which is a specified result and is different from the first specified pattern combination, stops at the effective position,
From the first specific pattern (for example, the "watermelon" pattern associated with the second replay winning prize of the right reel 32R) forming the first specific pattern combination in a predetermined specific circular body among the circular bodies Also, the second specific pattern (for example, the “black BAR” pattern associated with the second replay winning prize on the right reel 32R) that constitutes the second specific pattern combination in the specific circular body is more likely to be used by the player. The game machine according to feature F2 or feature F3, characterized in that the pattern is set as an easily visible pattern.

With the configuration described above, the degree of difficulty of operation in the second operation mode is lower than that in the first operation mode, also from the viewpoint of the visibility of the pattern. By doing so, it is possible to provide a difference in operation difficulty between the first operation mode and the second operation mode with a simpler configuration.

More specifically, "the second specific pattern is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first specific pattern." The display area to be displayed is larger" or "the main color attached to the second specific pattern has a greater color difference with the surrounding colors than the main color attached to the first specific pattern. It can also be expressed as "large".

Feature F5. In the advantageous state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means performed in the specific state is the specific result is higher than the lottery result by the lottery means performed in the non-specific state than the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the probability is likely to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the advantageous state can be ended by the operation mode when the specific result is won, the probability of winning the specific result is higher in the specific state than in the non-specific state in the advantageous state. becomes easier. If you want to dare to end the advantageous state that makes it easier to transition to a specific state, in addition to the situation where the transition to the specific state does not occur, even if you are staying in the specific state, you will be in the normal state until you end the specific state. It is assumed that the situation should be shifted to In this case, since the mode notification is performed in the specific state, the number of games to be played is often limited, and the scene in which the specific state is dared to end is the remaining remaining games. This is a scene in which the game is to be finished before the number of games to be executed is completed, and it can be said that it is a relatively urgent scene. Therefore, by defining the winning probability of the specific result as in the above configuration, it is possible to favorably perform the end operation during the urgent specific state.

Feature F6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a first operation instruction notification means (by the display control device 81 A function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect for the first replay winning prize when a fall replay is won);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a second operation instruction notification means (by the display control device 81) capable of notifying the operation instruction to operate in the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means A function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect for the second replay winning prize when a fall replay is won);
Determination means capable of determining whether a predetermined specific condition is established in the specific state (function for executing determination processing of whether or not a specific notification flag is set by the display control device 81);
When the judgment result by the judging means is a result that the specific condition is not satisfied and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the first operation instruction informing means executes the operation instruction notification. and when the judgment result by the judging means is a result that the specific condition is established and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the operation instruction by the second operation instruction informing means means for enabling the notification (function for executing the pressing order notification process by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, an operation instruction to operate in the first operation mode so as not to end the advantageous state in the specific state until the specific condition is satisfied is performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is entered. An operation instruction notification for performing an operation in the second operation mode is performed so as to terminate the operation. By doing so, it is possible to avoid erroneously ending the advantageous state and the specific state even though the player has made the transition to the specific state from the advantageous state.

Feature F7. Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific state using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information was obtained. (Function to execute AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
Specific transition means (main controller 101) for shifting to the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
With regard to the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, information in the case where the predetermined specific information is the target of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is added to the specific lottery. Preliminary comprehension means (function for executing pending display processing by the display control device 81) that can be comprehended in a game prior to the target game;
with
The specific condition is a result that the grasped result by the first grasping means is more likely to be the specific result when the specific lottery using the predetermined specific information is performed in the normal state than in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that it holds as one condition that:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause the transition to the specific state using the specific information obtained in advance, the specific lottery using the predetermined specific information is performed in an advantageous state. If the specific result is more likely to be obtained in the normal state than in the normal state, the specific condition is established and the operation instruction notification during the specific state changes to that for ending the advantageous state. By doing so, when a specific condition is satisfied in one specific state, it becomes possible to prompt the resetting of the specific state, and the continuity of the specific state is realized by shifting to the specific state and resetting. It becomes possible to

Feature F8. A lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and a privilege provided by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode and a lottery result by the lottery means are the above. Any of the features F1 to F7, wherein the specified result is common to the benefit granted by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, although there is a difference as to whether or not the advantageous state is ended, the benefit given depending on the operation mode when winning the specific result does not change. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify which operation mode should be operated when winning a specific result can occur not only in an advantageous state but also in a normal state.

Feature F9. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd minor combination to 26th minor combination) that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from , press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed. and are set,
In the advantageous state, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined specified result and the first specified pattern combination stops at the effective position, the advantageous state is ended, and the first specified pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. When a second specific pattern combination different from the pattern combination stops at the effective position, a specific means (end of the second replay win by the main controller 101) capable of not ending the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a process for ending an advantageous section based on the stop of the symbols for use.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode as the lottery result by the lottery means. There are provided mode results in which different benefits are awarded depending on whether the player is operated or operated in the second operation mode, and when the mode result is won, mode notification of the operation mode is performed in a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit given to the player is changed depending on whether or not there is state notification. Moreover, such a specific state is included in the advantageous state, and mode notification is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, the advantageous state can be said to be more advantageous to the player in terms of game characteristics using the mode notification.

On the other hand, for example, there are needs of players who do not want to transition to an advantageous state or maintain an advantageous state. In some cases, such as when waiting for a transition to a specific state in a situation close to the conditions for forced termination in an advantageous state, it may be advantageous to terminate the advantageous state once. However, leaving the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state to the player is not preferable in terms of game management and anti-fraud measures.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and the first specified pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the advantageous state can be terminated, while the lottery by the lottery means can be terminated. Even if the result is a specified result, the advantageous state is not terminated when the second specified pattern combination different from the first specified pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, so that the advantageous state is terminated. While allowing the player to decide whether or not to allow the game to be played by operating the stop operation means, the lottery by the game machine is involved in it, and it is possible to appropriately manage whether or not the advantageous state ends in a well-balanced manner.

It should be noted that each configuration defined by the features F1 to F8 may be applied individually to the feature F9, or may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd minor combination to 26th minor combination) that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from , press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed. and are set,
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means, a specific lottery to determine whether to shift to the specific state is performed after the game in which the specific information is acquired. Specific lottery means executable in the game (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101);
Specific transition means (main controller 101) for shifting to the specific state based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state. function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode by),
with
As the specific information, special information (AT corresponding to the first specific combination) is more likely to result in the specific result when the specific lottery is performed in the normal state than when the specific lottery is performed in the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that counters (0 to 56) are set.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode as the lottery result by the lottery means. There are provided mode results in which different benefits are awarded depending on whether the player is operated or operated in the second operation mode, and when the mode result is won, mode notification of the operation mode is performed in a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the profit given to the player is changed depending on whether or not there is state notification. Moreover, the specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the transition to the specific state in which such mode notification is performed is performed using the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means. Since the game is performed after the game in which the information is acquired, the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, and the lottery result by the lottery means and the stop result of the orbiting body are simply obtained. A completely different game property from the conventional slot machine such as matching with is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, such a specific state is included in the advantageous state, and the mode notification is not performed in the normal state. When the specific information acquired by the specific information acquiring means is special information, the normal state wins the specific lottery more than the advantageous state in the specific lottery using the special information. becomes easier. By doing so, when the specific information is special information, only in the game in which the special information is used for the specific lottery, an event occurs in which the normal state is more advantageous than the advantageous state, and the advantageous state occurs. Advantages and disadvantages of each state can be reversed, even though it is assumed that is more advantageous than the normal state. In this case, for example, when the pre-acquired specific information is special information, it is possible to notify that effect or to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state. In this way, by using the above configuration, it is possible to break away from the simple game property that is advantageous only if it is in an advantageous state, and to create a new game property, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Feature G2. The specific lottery means, in the normal state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (for example, normal replay or push order bell) and the specific information is the special information, the lottery result of the specific lottery is set to be the specific result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (for example, a rare hand such as a strong cherry) different from the first result, and the specific information is the special The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein in the case of information, the lottery result of the specific lottery is set to be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed using a set of the lottery results of the lottery means and the specific information, the special information that makes it easier to win the specific lottery in the normal state is different from the first result. It is set to win both when a specific lottery is held for a set and when a specific lottery is held for a set with a second result. In other words, when the specific lottery is performed using the special information, the player wins the specific lottery regardless of whether the lottery result of the game is the first result or the second result. In this case, for example, in order to make it easier to win in a specific lottery using special information, it is conceivable to increase the appearance rate of the lottery result by the lottery means that wins in combination with the special information. However, there is an upper limit to increasing the appearance rate of the lottery result due to the relationship between the ball output rate and the appearance rate of other results. In this regard, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to realize the event that makes it easier to win the specific lottery using the special information without changing the lottery result of the lottery means.

Feature G3. The specific lottery means, in the advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a third result (for example, a rare combination such as a strong cherry) and the specific information is the predetermined second special information, The lottery result of the specific lottery is set to be the specific result,
The winning probability of the specific lottery in the advantageous state calculated from the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the third result and the probability that the specific information acquisition means acquires the second special information is the lottery higher than the winning probability of the specific lottery in the normal state calculated from the probability that the lottery result by the means will be the first result or the second result, and the probability that the specific information acquisition means will acquire the special information. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that it is set so that

In the above configuration, in the configuration where a specific lottery is obtained by applying a plurality of lottery results and a set to the specific lottery as in the feature G2, in an advantageous state, the specific lottery is performed with the set of the third result and the second special information. By adding a specific result, considering the probability that the first result, the second result, and the third result will be obtained in each game, and the probability that the special information and the second special information will be acquired, the overall The probabilities of the first to third results and the probabilities of acquiring the special information and the second special information are set so that the advantageous state is more likely to result in the specified result. By doing so, it is possible to secure the superiority of the advantageous state with respect to the winning probability of the specific lottery while using the configuration in which the special information is given to the specific lottery as a set with a plurality of lottery results in the normal state. becomes.

Feature G4. The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability that the lottery result will be the first result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second result,
The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the third result is the second result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first result is more likely to be won than the second result, in the normal state, the set of the first result or the second result and the special information wins the specific lottery, and is in an advantageous state. , the specific lottery is won with the set of the second result and the second special information. In other words, the result of the specific lottery in the case of a second result called a so-called rare hand with a low probability of winning differs depending on the specific information that has been acquired, in the normal state and in the advantageous state. By adopting such a configuration, in order to make it easier for the overall advantageous state to be the specific result, the numerical range of the special information and the second special information associated when the second result is obtained It is possible to set the winning probability of the specific lottery with a relatively simple configuration by widening the side of the advantageous state or increasing the number of types on the side of the advantageous state.

Feature G5. The specific lottery means is characterized in that the lottery result of the specific lottery is not the specific result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result in the advantageous state. A gaming machine described in G4.

According to the above configuration, the first result with a high winning probability is not associated with the specific information that becomes the specific result in the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state as a whole is more likely to become the specific result. Therefore, it is possible to maximize the range of numerical values between the special information and the second special information that are associated when the second result is obtained. That is, in an advantageous state, although the first result does not win the specific lottery, it is possible to maximize the winning probability of the specific lottery when the second result is obtained. As a result, it is possible to create a distinct advantageous state, and to improve the interest in the advantageous state.

Feature G6. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result or the second result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the third result,
Characteristic features G3 to G5, characterized in that the probability that the specific information acquisition means acquires the special information is set to be lower than the probability that the specific information acquisition means acquires the second special information. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of features G3 to G5.

Feature G7. The specific lottery means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (normal replay, non-question bell, push order bell, etc.) and the specific information is the special information, the lottery result of the specific lottery is the specific lottery result. is set to result in
When the game state is the first game state (for example, the normal game state) and when it is the second game state (for example, the third RT state) different from the first game state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the probability of obtaining a special result is common.

By clearly distinguishing between a normal state and an advantageous state, a fraudulent act of making a mode report occur even though the transition to a specific state has not occurred, or illegally trying to enjoy the benefits of the mode report. There is an advantage that the administrator of the game hall or the like can easily specify the . In this regard, if the specific lottery is performed even in the normal state, if the specific lottery is performed with the result that the winning probability differs depending on the game state, the winning probability of the specific lottery will differ depending on the game state, and the significance of the advantageous state , which makes it more difficult to identify such fraudulent activities. On the other hand, in the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed using the set of the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information, the special result of winning the specific lottery with the set of the special information is determined depending on the game state. The result is that the probability does not change. By doing so, even if the specific lottery is performed in the normal state, it is possible to make a clear distinction between the advantageous state and the above-described inconvenience.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result (first minor combination) is won by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. A second operation result (2nd minor combination to 26th minor combination) that can be given a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in a second operation mode different from , press order bell) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification execution means (main a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the control device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which it is possible to shift to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification executing means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (advantageous section) in which transition to the specific state is more difficult than in the advantageous state ( Normal section) and are set,
In the normal state, based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the predetermined first opportunity result (all results excluding failure), an advantageous transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous state. Advantageous transition lottery means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main controller 101);
Advantageous state transition means (main A function of executing processing for shifting to an advantageous section by the control device 101);
Specific transition lottery means (main A function of executing AT lottery processing by the control device 101);
Specific state transition means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
with
In a predetermined specific situation, after the lottery result by the lottery means is the first opportunity result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the second opportunity result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the above-mentioned result. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is set so that it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second opportunity result before the first opportunity result is achieved.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the advantageous state in which transition to the specific state is likely to occur in which mode notification is likely to occur and the normal state in which transition to the specific state is unlikely to occur are set, when the first trigger result is reached A lottery for transition to an advantageous state is performed, and when the second transition result is obtained, a lottery for transition to a specific state is performed. Also, it is advantageous for the player if the second chance result is achieved before the first chance result is achieved. In other words, if it is normal, it is advantageous to receive the first trigger result and receive a lottery to move to an advantageous state, and then transition to an advantageous state before becoming the second trigger result in terms of ease of transition to an advantageous state. However, in certain situations it is reversed. Since we have made it possible for such a specific situation to occur, while stipulating a gradual state transition from normal state → advantageous state → specific state, it is easy to transition to a specific state in the lowest normal state, etc. A situation occurs in which the advantage of is reversed, and the interest in the normal state can be improved.

In the above configuration, "in a predetermined specific situation, rather than the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the second opportunity result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first opportunity result, the "Set in advance so that it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second opportunity result before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first opportunity result" In a predetermined specific situation, the lottery result by the lottery means is more favorable than the lottery result by the lottery means is the second opportunity result in the game after the lottery result by the lottery means is the first opportunity result. It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player if the lottery result by the lottery means in the game before the first trigger result is the second trigger result."

Feature H2. In the specific situation, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second opportunity before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first opportunity result and the lottery result by the advantageous transition lottery means becomes the advantageous transition result. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the result of the specific transition lottery by the specific transition lottery means based on the second trigger result tends to be the specific transition result when the trigger result is obtained.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature H1. With such a configuration, it is assumed that the advantageous state is easier to transition to the specific state than the normal state as a whole, but in the specific situation, the normal state is more favorable than the advantageous state. A reversal phenomenon occurs in which a transition to a specific state is likely to occur, and the game in the normal state can be remarkably improved.

Feature H3. Characteristic feature H1 or The game machine according to feature H2.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of the first trigger result is higher than the probability of the second trigger result, the first specific result tends to occur earlier than the second trigger result. Therefore, even if the normal state is more advantageous than the advantageous state, such as a specific situation, it will be more limited, and the situation where the advantage of the advantageous state will be reversed will be more limited. , the attention to the situation can be favorably increased.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the second trigger result is included in the first trigger result.

According to the above configuration, although the phenomenon that the first triggered result is not the second triggered result occurs, the phenomenon that the second triggered result is not the first triggered result does not occur. In this way, by allowing the duplication of both trigger results, the degree of freedom in selecting the trigger results is greatly improved.

Feature H5. When the lottery result of the lottery means in the normal state is the second trigger result, the advantageous transition lottery is executed by the advantageous transition lottery means in the normal state, and the specific transition lottery means in the normal state is executed. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the specific transfer lottery is executed.

The above configuration defines the mode of the transition lottery when the two trigger results overlap. is clarified. As a result, the reversal phenomenon of the degree of advantage in the normal state can be suitably realized.

Feature H6. Preliminary grasping means (function for executing pending display processing by the display control device 81) capable of grasping that the specific situation may occur before the specific situation occurs;
Execution of specific notification that can be executed by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) before the specific situation occurs, based on the result of grasping by the preceding grasping means. means (function for executing processing for performing specific notification by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific situation can be grasped by the specific notification before the specific situation occurs. By doing so, if the specific notification is in the normal state, the game will be played while expecting it, and if the specific notification is in the advantageous state, it is expected that the transition to the normal state will occur. In any case, it is thought that the subsequent game posture will greatly change with the specific notification as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the specific notification executing means is capable of executing the specific notification in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification regarding the specific situation in the normal state is made during the advantageous state. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, he or she wishes to make a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, and it is possible to provide a novel gameplay that evokes a completely opposite feeling from the conventional one. Become.

Feature H8. Even if the prior grasping means has grasped that the specific situation can occur, the lottery result by the lottery means is the second trigger before the lottery result by the lottery means is the first trigger result. The gaming machine of feature H7, wherein if a result occurs in the advantageous condition, it is more disadvantageous than if it occurred in the normal condition.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that when the specific notification is performed during the advantageous state, it is meaningless unless a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state occurs. By doing so, it is possible to make the player crave for the transition to the normal state more, and to realize an interesting game that has not existed in the past.

Feature H9. Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
with
The specific transfer lottery means can execute the specific transfer lottery using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information was acquired. ,
With regard to the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the prior grasping means grasps information in the case where the predetermined specific information is subject to the specific transition lottery in the normal state. The game machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that it has a configuration that enables grasping of the possibility of the specific situation.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature H6, the lottery for transition to the specific state is performed using the specific information obtained in advance, and the predetermined specific information obtained in advance is used for the specific transition lottery in the normal state. Based on the information in the case of becoming a target, it is grasped that it may become a specific situation, and the specific notification is performed based on the grasped result. In this way, the specific situation can be easily grasped, and the game property using the specific notification can be suitably realized.

Feature H10. With regard to the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the prior grasping means is configured to determine whether the specific transfer lottery will be performed when the predetermined specific information is subject to the specific transfer lottery in the normal state. It is possible to comprehend that the specific transition result will be obtained by performing based on a predetermined second trigger result,
The specific notification execution means is
A notification that enables transition from the advantageous state to the normal state can be executed as the specific notification,
A lottery result by the lottery means when the predetermined specific information is the target of the specific transition lottery in the normal state is the predetermined second opportunity result, and the predetermined specific information is the specific transition lottery. The probability that the first opportunity result is not obtained in the normal state before becoming the target of is the specific transition result in the case where the predetermined specific information is the target of the specific transition lottery in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein the specific notification can be made when the probability of the game is higher than that of the game.

In the normal state, if the predetermined specific information has a high probability of becoming the first chance result before the predetermined second chance result in the game targeted for the specific transition lottery, the normal state is shifted to. , it is highly likely that they will not be able to substantially benefit from the particular circumstances. In that respect, in the above configuration, the probability that the predetermined specific information will result in the first trigger result before the predetermined second trigger result in the game that is the target of the specific transition lottery, and the probability that the predetermined specific information will be obtained in an advantageous state Since the transition to the normal state is caused by considering the probability of a specific transition result when receiving a specific lottery using information, it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the specific situation more preferably. Become.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature H group to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group H detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled by inserting a game ball through the above.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
a specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a predetermined specific event will occur in a specific game;
specific execution means for causing the specific event based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
with
When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode in a predetermined game in a specific state in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted, the specific game becomes a first specific game,
In the predetermined game in the specific state, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the specific game is a game after the first specific game. A gaming machine characterized by being a second specific game.

Images